Lucent Technologies Network Router merlin messaging system User Manual

Contents  
Select a Category Below:  
System Planning and  
Completion of Forms  
Configuration and  
Programming  
Ongoing Maintenance and  
Administration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
System Planning and Completion of Forms  
System Overview  
Call Handling Planning  
Completing the MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Appendix A: MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
System Planning and Completion of Forms  
Programming Conventions  
System Overview  
Call Handling Planning  
Completing the MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Appendix A: MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
The MERLIN Messaging Online Guide contains detailed information about the MERLIN  
Messaging System.  
View and print MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms.  
This section, Getting Started, will walk you through a brief explanation of the conventions  
and procedures used in the Online Guide and will help you to use this reference effectively.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customized "Paths" through Information/Procedures  
The MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide provides three customized "paths" through the  
Ongoing Maintenance and Administration  
This content helps you locate and access information based on the tasks you have to perform  
with respect to the system.  
Each path contains:  
Access to general information about the system.  
Detailed information and step-by-step instructions for completing the tasks specific to  
the selected path.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Navigation  
You can move from one topic to another in the Online Guide by activating topic-associated  
hypertext links. This can be done from:  
A topic listed in the Contents Panel on the left side of the screen  
The Technology Bar at the bottom of the screen  
Within the topic text  
The Contents Panel  
The Contents Panel is displayed along the left side of the window. It provides a way for you to  
quickly identify and access the information you need to locate. Because it is displayed in a  
stationary part of the window (that is, it doesn’t change or move), you can easily locate the topic  
you want to view. Note that the arrow pinpoints your current location in the topic listing.  
The Technology Bar  
The Technology Bar located at the lower right-hand corner of the screen contains a number of  
icons. Each icon is responsible for a different navigational action.  
Icon  
Action  
Redisplays the Main menu options in the Contents Panel  
Links to the previous topic in the sequence  
Takes you to the top of the window  
Links to the next topic in the sequence  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
An element that triggers a change on an item (usually a graphic) in a Web page when the mouse passes over it. The change usually signifies that the item is a link to related or  
additional information.  
Pop-Up Windows  
The MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide makes use of pop-up windows and mouseovers (through which  
your movement of the cursor over a screen object or image initiates another display or activity) or to provide  
additional information. Typically, pop-up windows and mouseovers contain material that supplements  
information appearing in the main window (for example, a more detailed explanation, a link to a Glossary term, a  
field description, etc.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Button Bar  
The Button Bar is displayed in a non-scrolling panel across the top of the screen. It provides  
access to additional online features and capabilities. To view a feature or access a capability, click  
the associated button. Note that in the case of features displayed in pop-up windows (for example,  
the Glossary), you must close the window before you can proceed.  
Button  
Action  
Redisplays the Main menu  
options in the Contents  
Panel  
Allows you to search for  
information by entering a  
key word  
Links you to the MERLIN  
Messaging System Glossary  
Provides access to the  
online Help feature  
Displays a table containing  
Touch Tones and rules  
which are valid for all  
menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Conventions  
The procedures for programming the MERLIN Messaging System in this Online Guide use  
several conventions to indicate what the steps involve. The conventions are described in the  
following table:  
Typeface Sample  
Meaning  
To select this option, press this imprinted button on the  
console  
GrpCalling  
To select this menu option, press the unlabeled display button  
next to the option  
[nnn]  
Enter the variable information in brackets  
Press this key on the PC  
Press this function key on the PC  
+
On the PC, hold down the first key and press the second key  
Continuation of procedures  
That completes the walk-through of the MERLIN Messaging Online Guide. To begin accessing  
information related to your selected path, click one of the topics listed in the Contents Panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Contents  
System Planning and Completion of Forms  
Getting Started  
Introduction  
Services and  
Features  
System Capacities  
System  
Components  
Environmental  
Requirements  
Programmer  
Responsibilities  
Personnel  
Responsibilities  
Features  
Call Handling Planning  
Completing the MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Appendix A: MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PCMCIA Slots  
The left-most PCMCIA slot houses the 2-Port, 4-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, 10-Port, or 12-Port PC  
Card required for operation of the MERLIN Messaging System.  
NOTE: Only the left-most of the two PCMCIA slots can be used. The right-most slot is  
reserved for future use.  
The 2-Port, 4-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, 10-Port, or 12-Port PC Card contains:  
Port licensing data that triggers the activation of the appropriate number of voice  
messaging ports.  
A Remote Maintenance Device (RMD), used for remote access to diagnostic and  
maintenance features of the system.  
Media for performing system backup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
MERLIN Messaging System Release 2 is an embedded voice messaging system housed in a module (circuit  
pack) that plugs into the switch's carrier. Release 2 is available in a 2-, 4-, 6-, 8-, 10-, or 12-Port configuration.  
Release 1 and 1.1 is available in a 2-, 4-, or 6-Port configuration. For a description of each module component,  
move the mouse pointer over the graphic below.  
Port Level LEDs:  
The port-specific LEDs on the Merlin Messaging faceplate indicate the current status of each  
voice messaging port. The possible variations are:  
Not available  
In service and idle  
In service and in use  
Note: The port-specific LEDs that correspond to voice messaging ports are in ascending order  
(that is, from the bottom up).  
RS232 Port:  
This is a serial port used for local access to the MERLIN Messaging System via a PC or  
laptop computer for report, maintenance and administrative purposes. Access to the  
MERLIN Messaging System using the RS-232 port is both login and password protected.  
System Status LED:  
This LED reflects the status of the MERLIN Messaging System. The LED displays a red,  
green or amber light to indicate various stages of system status and readiness (for example,  
booting, self-test failure, system upgrade in progress, etc.).  
Local Area Network (LAN) Connection:  
This port is used to connect the system to a LAN (Release 2 or later).  
Port Status LEDs:  
The port-specific LEDs on the MERLIN Messaging System faceplate indicate the current  
status of each voice messaging port. The possible variations are:  
Not available  
In service and idle  
In service and in use  
Note: The port-specific LEDs that correspond to voice messaging ports are in ascending order  
(that is, from the bottom up).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Allows mailbox owners to:  
Record and send messages.  
Listen to messages.  
Forward and reply to messages.  
Record their names or Personal Greetings.  
Activate a Personal Greeting.  
Change their Personal Operators.  
Change their passwords.  
Set up Outcalling (if permission provided).  
Create Personal Group Lists.  
Change Call Answer mode.  
Transfer to another extension.  
Allows individuals responsible for programming the MERLIN Messaging System to:  
Administer System Parameters such as System Language mode and System Date  
and Time.  
Administer an extension to be either a Mailbox, Fax, Transfer-Only or Automated  
Attendant Extension.  
Administer up to four Automated Attendants.  
Administer System Security Options.  
Administer System Group Lists (Release 2 or later).  
Perform a System Backup or System Restore.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Answers incoming lines and presents callers with a list of options. Based on callers'  
resulting input, they may be:  
Transferred to an extension.  
Played an informational announcement.  
Transferred to a voice mailbox.  
Presented with a submenu containing additional options.  
The Automated Attendant Service can also detect and route fax calls to a  
predetermined fax extension.  
Functions as a personal answering machine, allowing a caller to:  
Hear the Personal Greeting recorded by the mailbox owner.  
Switch to the alternate language, if the system is configured in Bilingual mode.  
Leave a voice message, if this capability has been programmed by the mailbox  
owner.  
Optionally designate voice message as a priority or private message (Release 2 or  
later).  
Transfer to an operator or to another extension.  
Provides on-site and remote system serviceability functionality, including:  
Terminal-based reporting  
Trouble/fault isolation  
Backup and Restoration  
The MERLIN Messaging System can operate in either Monolingual or Bilingual mode. In  
Monolingual mode, all system prompts are played in one of the following languages:  
U.S. English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
In Milingual mode, the caller can choose to hear prompts in either the Primary or  
Secondary language.  
Services and Features  
For a description of each MERLIN Messaging System service or feature, move the mouse  
pointer over the graphic below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration  
There is one common module (circuit pack) for all six MERLIN Messaging System  
configurations (that is, a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port configuration). A  
2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port PC Card, included with each system, contains  
the following components:  
Port licensing for the system's port configuration (that is, a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port,  
10-port, or 12-port configuration)  
Media for backing up and restoring the system  
A 14.4 kbps Remote Maintenance Device (modem) used for remote diagnostics  
For Release 1 and 1.1, one common module supports three configurations (that is, a 2-port,  
4-port, or 6-port configuration). A 2-port, 4-port, or 6-port PC card is included with each  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Assignments  
The communications system assigns logical IDs and extensions to each port on the MERLIN  
Messaging System module. The first logical ID and extension assigned to the MERLIN Messaging  
System module is assigned to Port 1, the second to Port 2, etc. The communications system assigns 12  
logical IDs and extensions to the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
In Release 2 or later, if a Message-Waiting Light (MWL) update or Outcalling action needs to be  
performed, the following ports are used:  
Port 2 on a 2-port system  
Port 4 on a 4-port system  
Ports 5 and 6 on a 6-port system  
Ports 7 and 8 on an 8-port system  
Ports 9 and 10 on a 10-port system  
Ports 11 and 12 on a 12-port system  
The Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) is not assigned to a dedicated logical ID and extension.  
The following table defines the Port Assignments for the MERLIN Messaging System Release 2 or  
later.  
Ports  
7
System  
Configuration  
1 2  
3
4
5
6
8
9
10  
11  
12  
2-port  
V V N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E  
4-port  
6-port  
8-port  
10-port  
12-port  
V V V  
V V V  
V V V  
V V V  
V V V  
V
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E  
V
V
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E N/E N/E  
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E  
V
V
V = Voice  
N/E = Not Equipped  
In Release 1 or 1.1, if a Message-Waiting Light (MWL) update or Outcalling action needs to be  
performed, the following ports are used:  
Port 2 on a 2-port system  
Port 4 on a 4-port system  
Port 6 on a 6-port system  
The Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) is assigned to the twelfth logical ID and extension.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System LEDs  
The MERLIN Messaging System module faceplate contains:  
One system status LED  
One LED for each of the voice ports  
The color(s) and status (that is, on, off or blinking) of the LEDs provide information regarding the  
operation of the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
The table below provides a description of the port-level and system status LED display variations.  
Display Meaning  
Port-Level LEDs  
Port not available for use (off)  
Port in service and idle (on-hook)  
Port in use (off-hook)  
System Status LED  
System is not powered up or there is a fault condition  
System is in a ready state (off-hook; speaking or recording; receiving Touch Tones)  
There is a self-test failure or system is out-of-service  
There is a self-test failure or system is out-of-service  
System software is being upgraded  
Hard disk is active  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Capacities  
The following table provides a summary of MERLIN Messaging System capacities.  
| System Parameters | Extensions | Automated Attendants | System Security | System Group  
Lists | User Options |  
Feature  
Capacity  
Factory Settings  
System Administration Prompt Language  
U.S. English, Latin American  
U.S. English  
Spanish, Canadian French,  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release  
2 or later)  
System Parameters  
System Language  
U.S. English, Latin American  
Spanish, Canadian French,  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release  
2 or later)  
U.S. English  
Language Mode  
Call Answer Service Operator  
General Mailbox Owners  
Maximum Extension Length  
Message Storage  
Monolingual or Bilingual  
1 maximum  
Monolingual  
Ext. 768  
10 (total)  
2 digits  
N/A  
1 per General Mailbox  
2, 3 or 4 digits  
100 hours  
Extensions  
Mailbox Extensions  
200 maximum for any port  
None  
configuration  
Maximum Number of  
120 messages  
N/A  
Messages per Mailbox  
Mailbox Size  
5 – 180 minutes  
(administered per  
mailbox)  
20 minutes  
Message Length  
Mailbox Language  
2 – 60 minutes  
(administered per  
mailbox)  
4 minutes  
U.S. English, Latin  
American Spanish,  
Canadian French,  
System/Primary  
Language  
Brazilian Portuguese  
(Release 2 or later)  
Outcalling Permission  
On or Off  
400 maximum  
10 maximum  
Off  
None  
None  
Transfer-Only Extensions  
Automated Attendant  
Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax Extensions  
4 (One for each Automated  
Attendant; Fax Extensions  
can be shared by multiple  
Automated Attendants)  
None  
General Mailbox  
4 (one for each Automated  
9991, 9992, 9993, 9994  
Attendant)  
Automated Attendants  
Number of Automated  
4 maximum  
4  
Attendants  
Modes of Operation  
2 (Day mode and Night  
N/A  
mode)  
Submenus  
99 maximum  
None  
Announcements  
Schedule Controller  
99 maximum  
None  
Follow Switch mode, Weekly  
Switch Mode  
Business Schedule or both  
Main menu Prompts,  
Submenu Prompts and  
Announcements  
2 minutes in length maximum  
N/A  
for each  
Number of Line Assignments  
System Security  
80 per Messaging System  
N/A  
Minimum Password Length  
Maximum Password Length  
Transfer Restrictions  
0 –15 digits  
15 digits  
6 digits  
15 digits (fixed)  
On  
On or Off  
System Group Lists  
10 maximum with up to  
50 mailbox extensions in  
each list  
N/A  
User Options  
Outcalling Telephone/Pager  
Numbers (administered by  
user)  
5 maximum  
N/A  
Outcalling Cycles  
1–9  
3  
Outcalling Interval  
Outcalling Schedule  
Outcalling Activation  
5 – 99 minutes  
Range is 0000 – 2359  
15 minutes  
24 hours  
All messages  
Outcalling for all  
messages or priority  
messages only  
Personal Greetings (recorded  
6 maximum  
System Greeting  
by user)  
Group Lists (administered by  
10 maximum with up to 50  
N/A  
user)  
extensions in each list  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Personal Operator  
1 per user  
Call Answer Service  
Operator  
Call Answer Mode  
Record mode or  
Record mode  
answer-only mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Components  
The MERLIN Messaging System module resides in a slot in the communications system carrier.  
One common module supports a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port configuration. (In  
Release 1 or 1.1, the module supports a 2-port, 4-port, or 6-port configuration.)  
Component  
Module  
Description  
LEDs  
One LED indicates system status and one LED  
for each port indicates port status. See the  
MERLIN Messaging System Installation,  
Programming, and Troubleshooting Online  
Guide for more information about the LEDs.  
RS-232 Serial Port  
Used to directly connect a PC or laptop to the  
system.  
Local Area Network  
Used to connect the system to a LAN (Release  
(LAN) connection  
2 or later).  
PCMCIA Slots  
10-port, or 12-port PC card. Only the left-most  
slot should be used.  
Touch-Tone Receivers (TTRs)  
Two TTRs serve as communications system  
resources (an internal component of the  
module).  
PC Card  
The PC Cards provide:  
Remote Maintenance Device (RMD).  
Media for performing system backup.  
2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or  
12-port PC Card  
Port licensing required for the 2-port, 4-port,  
6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port  
configuration.  
Port LEDs  
The port LEDs are single lights which function according to the configuration. For example, in a  
2-port configuration, only the LEDs for Port 1 and Port 2 operate while, in an 8-port configuration,  
LEDs for Ports 1 through 8 operate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Environmental Requirements  
For proper operations, the MERLIN Messaging installation site must meet the environmental  
requirements described in the table below.  
Condition  
Requirement  
Relative Humidity 15% - 90% non-condensing  
Temperature Range 32° F to 122° F (0° C to 50° C)  
Air Quality  
Dust-free area (preferably in an office environment)  
Environment  
Power Supply  
No exposure to liquids. Avoid areas near drinking fountains, coffee makers, etc.  
For the USA, Canada and other countries that use a USA-type outlet (nominal voltage 117  
VAC), the communications system must have a 391A3 or newer power supply module  
installed in the same carrier in which the MERLIN Messaging System module is installed.  
In countries with nominal voltage of 220 VAC, a 391B2 or newer power supply module is  
required in the same carrier in which the MERLIN Messaging System module is installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installer and Programmer Responsibilities  
The individual installing and programming the MERLIN Messaging System is responsible for  
the following tasks:  
Installing the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System module to provide the services specified  
by the customer.  
Programming the communications system to support MERLIN Messaging System  
operation.  
Reviewing configuration reports to ensure that all system parameters, line assignments,  
Automated Attendant menus and Announcements are correct and current.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Company Personnel Responsibilities  
Before the MERLIN Messaging System is programmed, company personnel should be  
designated to serve in the following support roles:  
General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Manager Responsibilities  
The System Manager is responsible for performing the following routine maintenance tasks:  
Maintaining Voice Mailboxes, for example:  
Adding and deleting voice mailboxes.  
Resetting (initializing) voice mailbox passwords when forgotten.  
Changing user's mailbox language.  
Maintaining Transfer-Only, Automated Attendant and Fax Extensions.  
Changing Automated Attendant Menus, Announcements and Line Assignments to  
reflect changes in line assignment, personnel, company operations or company services.  
Maintaining the Automated Attendant Schedule to assure that the appropriate  
Automated Attendant menus and announcements are played in connection with holidays  
and temporary company closings or openings.  
Maintaining System Parameters to make system-wide changes (for example, changing  
date and time, the Call Answer Service Operator extension or General Mailbox  
Owners).  
Maintaining System Security by responding to user inquiries and by taking measures  
to prevent toll fraud and to safeguard the contents of mailboxes.  
Performing System Backups periodically or when changes are made to the MERLIN  
Messaging System.  
Maintaining Directory Listings to reflect changes in personnel.  
Reviewing Configuration Reports to ensure that all system parameters, line  
assignments, Automated Attendant menus and Announcements are current and correct.  
General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Call Answer Service (CAS) Operator Responsibilities  
In Automated Attendant Service, the Dial 0/Timeout Action is set to CAS Operator  
and:  
Caller presses  
.
Caller makes no selection.  
Caller presses  
Caller presses  
while using the directory to transfer.  
, then  
to transfer.  
In Voice Mail Service:  
User presses  
, then  
.
Caller presses  
while using the directory to transfer.  
In Call Answer Service:  
Caller presses  
or  
, then  
while the greeting is playing and the  
extension does not have a Personal Operator.  
Mailbox is in Answer-Only mode without a Personal Operator and caller presses  
or  
, then  
during the five-second timeout following the greeting.  
Caller presses  
or  
, then before or after leaving a message in a  
mailbox that does not have a Personal Operator.  
Caller presses while using the directory to transfer.  
The factory setting for the Call Answer Service Operator is 768. It is recommended that you do  
not change the factory setting.  
General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Mailbox Owner Responsibilities  
A person designated as a General Mailbox Owner is responsible for forwarding messages left  
in the General Mailbox to the intended user's mailbox.  
Action has been set to "Record a Message in the General Mailbox" and the caller does any of  
the following:  
The caller presses  
from an Automated Attendant Main menu, Submenu or an  
Announcement.  
The caller makes no Touch-Tone response to an Automated Attendant Main menu or  
Submenu.  
The caller presses  
while using the directory to transfer.  
Call Answer Service Operator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security Features  
The MERLIN Messaging System includes security features to help protect your system from  
toll fraud abuse. These features include:  
A Transfer Restriction capability that allows the System Manager to restrict call transfer  
destinations only to those extensions administered by the System Manager.  
A Minimum Password Length setting that allows the System Manager to choose a  
minimum length for the passwords of users' voice mailboxes. A Minimum Password  
Length setting of at least six digits is recommended.  
Password Protection for Mailboxes and the Diagnostic and Maintenance Interface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Centralized Voice Messaging in a Private Network  
Completing the MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Appendix A: MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Call Handling Planning  
Before you fill out the planning forms for the MERLIN Messaging System, you must decide  
which call handling method your system will use.  
The MERLIN Messaging System and the communications system can be programmed to work  
Centralized Voice Messaging in a Private Network  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Immediate Call Handling  
If you want most incoming calls to be answered by an Automated Attendant with overflow  
calls handled by a communications system operator or any other extension, use Immediate Call  
Handling. With Immediate Call Handling, Automated Attendant Service answers all incoming  
calls and callers hear the Day Main menu or Night Main menu depending on the time of day  
and the Automated Attendant Schedule that you specify.  
When the MERLIN Messaging System is busy and cannot answer a call, you can arrange for  
the call to ring at another extension, such as Direct-Line Console (DLC) or Queued Call  
Console (QCC) operator position.  
To configure Immediate Call Handling, do the following:  
On the MERLIN Messaging System, assign lines to be answered immediately to the  
appropriate MERLIN Messaging Automated Attendant.  
On the communications system, assign the lines you want answered by the Automated  
Attendant to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group. Program backup Call  
Handling as follows:  
If you want a DLC or other telephone that is not a QCC to provide backup Call  
Handling for the Automated Attendant, assign the lines answered by the  
Automated Attendant as Personal Line buttons on the DLC or other telephone and  
set the Personal Line buttons to Delay Ring.  
If you want a QCC to provide backup for the Automated Attendant, program the  
MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group to overflow to the QCC queue and set  
the calling overflow thresholds as desired.  
Also, if the communications system uses Night Service, assign the MERLIN Messaging  
System Calling Group as a Night Service Receiver for each appropriate Night Service  
group.  
Centralized Voice Messaging in a Private Network  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Delayed Call Handling  
If you want most incoming calls to be answered by a Direct-Line Console system operator (or  
other telephone that is not a Queued Call Console (QCC) system operator position), use  
Delayed Call Handling. With Delayed Call Handling, incoming calls ring at a DLC system  
operator console (or at other telephones that have a Personal Line button for the line with the  
incoming call). If the call is not answered within a certain number of rings, the call is  
automatically sent to the MERLIN Messaging System and is answered by the Automated  
Attendant Service. Callers hear the Day Main menu or Night Main menu depending on the  
time of day and the Automated Attendant Schedule that you specify.  
To configure Delayed Call Handling:  
On the communications system, configure the following:  
Assign lines for immediate ring on the Direct-Line Console (DLC or other  
telephone that is not a Queued Call Console (QCC) system operator position).  
Next, select an unused calling group extension with no members (called a  
phantom calling group) and assign the lines that you want answered on a delayed  
basis by the Automated Attendant Service. Assign the MERLIN Messaging  
System Calling Group as the Overflow Coverage receiver for the Delayed Call  
Handling Calling Group and program the following Overflow Coverage settings:  
Set the Time-Based Overflow to the number of seconds that corresponds to  
the number of rings that you want the system operator to hear before the  
call is sent to the Automated Attendant  
Set the Number-Based Overflow for the Delayed Call Handling Calling  
Group to 99.  
On the MERLIN Messaging System, assign the new Delayed Call Handling Calling  
Group extension as an Automated Attendant extension with no phone.  
It is not necessary to assign lines to the Automated Attendant in this  
configuration.  
Note:  
Centralized Voice Messaging in a Private Network  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Night Only Call Handling  
If you want incoming calls handled by the MERLIN Messaging System Automated Attendant  
only when the communications system is in Night Service, use Night Only Call Handling. You  
can use Night Only Call Handling with Immediate Call Handling.  
To configure Night Only Call Handling:  
On the communications system, configure the following:  
Assign the lines answered by the Automated Attendant Service to the appropriate  
Night Service groups.  
The lines assigned for Night Only Call Handling treatment should not be  
assigned to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group.  
Note:  
Assign the MERLIN Messaging System as the Night Service receiver for all  
applicable Night Service groups.  
On the MERLIN Messaging System, assign lines to be answered immediately to the  
appropriate MERLIN Messaging Automated Attendant.  
Centralized Voice Messaging in a Private Network  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax Call Handling  
If you want the Automated Attendant Service to automatically route fax calls to a  
communications system fax extension or Fax Calling Group, use Fax Call Handling. With Fax  
Call Handling, you can associate an individual fax or fax calling group extension with each  
Automated Attendant. When the Automated Attendant detects a fax tone, the MERLIN  
Messaging System sends the call to the associated extension.  
The sending machine must produce industry-standard (CNG) tones to allow the fax call  
to be routed properly.  
Note:  
Fax Call Handling should be used with Immediate Call Handling only. Fax Call Handling  
cannot be used with Delayed Call Handling because the sending machine stops sending the fax  
calling (CNG) tone and hangs up after approximately 35 seconds. This may not be enough  
time for the call to be directed to the fax machine.  
To configure Fax Call Handling:  
On the communications system, configure the following:  
Identify the tip/ring jacks used to connect the fax machines. If you want more  
than one fax machine extension to be used for each Automated Attendant, create a  
Fax Calling Group and assign the fax extensions as members of the group. This  
allows calls to be directed to a single extension to be answered by an available fax  
machine assigned to the Fax Calling Group.  
Identify the extension that will receive the Message-Waiting indication when a  
fax is received.  
For each Automated Attendant on the MERLIN Messaging System, designate an  
individual fax extension or Fax Calling Group extension as the transfer destination for  
calls that the Automated Attendant detects as fax calls.  
Centralized Voice Messaging in a Private Network  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Centralized Voice Messaging in a Private Network  
The MERLIN Messaging System can also be used in a Centralized Voice Messaging  
configuration in a private network. MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems (Release 7.0  
(and later) and/or MERLIN MAGIX Integrated Systems connected in a private network by  
tandem trunks may share a centralized MERLIN Messaging System connected to one of the  
MERLIN LEGEND systems, which is then known as the "VMS hub" system. "Remote"  
MERLIN LEGEND systems which are directly connected to the "VMS hub" system by  
tandem trunks can then share the centralized MERLIN Messaging System.  
Coverage and overflow calls using Calling Groups from the VMS hub and any of the remote  
systems can be sent to the centralized MERLIN Messaging System. System users retrieving  
voice mail can call the same number from any location and be directly connected to the  
centralized MERLIN Messaging System. The centralized MERLIN Messaging System updates  
Message–Waiting lights across the private network for its subscribers on remote systems.  
The following are general guidelines for configuring a centralized MERLIN Messaging  
System. For complete details and programming instructions for networked systems, refer to the  
Network Reference for the communications system.  
On the communications systems in the private network, configure the following:  
The extensions and lines on all networked communications systems should be  
numbered unambiguously. For example, on communications system 1, extensions  
could be numbered between 1000–1999, on communications system 2, between  
2000–2999 and on communications system 3 between 3000–3999, etc. The lines  
on communications system 1 could be 1801–1880, on communications system 2  
2801–2880; and on communications system 3, 3801–3880.  
On the VMS Hub system (where the MERLIN Messaging System module is  
physically located), program the communications system for the MERLIN  
Messaging System as if it were a stand-alone communications system.  
On each remote communications system that will share the MERLIN Messaging  
System, program the communications system for the MERLIN Messaging System  
as if it were a stand-alone communications system with the following exception:  
For the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group, program only one  
member — a non–local Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) number that directs calls  
to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group on the VMS Hub  
system.  
For Message–Waiting lights to work across private networks, the communications  
systems must be connected via PRI, T1–TIE or E&M TIE lines. Also, the Switch  
Number must be programmed (refer to the Network Reference for complete  
details).  
On the MERLIN Messaging System, configure the following:  
Create a mailbox for each local and non–local extension that is to receive Voice  
Mail coverage.  
Create a transfer–only mailbox for each local and non–local extension as required.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Miscellaneous configuration information:  
Only the VMS Hub system can put the MERLIN Messaging into open and closed  
schedules.  
To use Night Only Call Handling, Delayed Call Handling or Immediate Call  
Handling, use the configuration and programming instructions for each type; for  
the communications system actions, program each of the communications system  
in the private network that will share the MERLIN Messaging System using  
instructions in the Network Reference.  
Fax Call Handling  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
System Planning and Completion of Forms  
System Overview  
Call Handling Planning  
Planning Form 6: System Group Lists  
Appendix A: MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
This section of the Online Guide has been designed to help you complete each of the MERLIN  
Messaging System Planning Forms. Once completed, these forms are used to program the  
MERLIN Messaging System.  
The material that follows contains:  
Directions for displaying and printing blank copies of each of the Planning Forms.  
During the system planning process, you can use the forms that you print to record  
information specific to your site.  
Sample completed forms.  
Field-by-field instructions for completing the forms. These instructions include  
explanations and recommendations for settings to ensure an optimum system  
configuration.  
The table on the next page  
lists the MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms and  
describes how each is used in the system planning process.  
The information that you enter on the MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
must be coordinated with certain requirements and specifications of your  
communications system. Be sure to obtain a copy of your communications System  
Planning Forms before you begin MERLIN Messaging System planning. Use them as  
a resource and update them with the MERLIN Messaging System information as  
Note:  
required.  
Related Topic  
Overview of the MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
Form  
1
Name  
Used to:  
Specify the System Programming Prompt  
System Parameters  
Language  
Define the System Language Mode and  
System Language(s)  
View the System Date and Time format  
Indicate the Call Answer Service  
Operator extension  
Identify the General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Specify the Maximum Extension Length  
2
Extension Administration  
Indicate a type for each extension in the  
system  
Indicate the Automated Attendant number  
Indicate the telephone status for an  
extension  
Indicate the name for an extension  
Record Directory Listing information for  
extensions  
Assign the appropriate characteristics to  
each Mailbox extension, including  
Mailbox Size and Message Length, if  
Outcalling is on or off, and Mailbox  
Language  
3a  
3b  
Automated Attendant Schedule  
and Fax Assignment  
Specify the Schedule Controller and, if  
applicable, the Weekly Business Schedule  
for each Automated Attendant  
Indicate the Fax Extension for each  
Automated Attendant  
Day/Night Main Menu  
Specify the Day/Night Main menu  
Selector Codes and Selector Code Action.  
Specify the Day/Night Main menu Dial  
0/Time-out Action selections  
3c  
3d  
4
Submenu  
Specify Submenu Selector Codes and  
Selector Code Action  
Recording Scripts  
Create scripts for Announcements,  
Submenus and the Day/Night Main menu  
Automated Attendant Line  
Assignments  
Indicate which Automated Attendant  
should answer each line  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
6
Security Settings  
Indicate whether Transfer Restrictions  
should be turned on or off  
Specify a Minimum Password Length for  
users  
System Group Lists (Release 2  
or later)  
Create up to ten System Group Lists that  
allow users to address a message to a  
group of mailboxes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Form 1: System Parameters  
1
Name  
Used to:  
Specify the System Programming Prompt  
System Parameters  
Language  
Define the System Language Mode and  
System Language(s)  
View the System Date and Time format  
Indicate the Call Answer Service Operator  
extension  
Identify the General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Specify the Maximum Extension Length  
The information that you enter on the System Parameters Form is used to program a number of  
characteristics that affect the general operation of the system. For example, whether the system  
operates in Monolingual or Bilingual mode affects the announcements, prompts and menus that  
callers will hear in Voice Mail Service (VMS), Call Answer Service (CAS) and Automated  
Attendant Service (AAS).  
Related Topics  
Access field-by-field instructions for completing the System Parameters Form  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 1: System Parameters  
| Print a blank System Parameters Form | Access field-by-field instructions for Completing the System  
Parameters Form |  
Below is a sample of the completed form:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Form 1: System Parameters  
| Print a blank System Parameters Form | View a sample, completed System Parameters Form |  
To view form completion instructions, click in the fields on the form facsimile  
below.  
To change a factory setting, cross out the factory setting and fill in the desired  
information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 2: Extension Administration  
Form Name  
Extension Administration  
Used to:  
Indicate a type for each extension in the system  
2
Indicate the Automated Attendant number  
Indicate the phone status for an extension  
Indicate the name for an extension  
Record Directory Listing information for user  
extensions  
Assign the appropriate characteristics to each user  
Mailbox, including Mailbox Size and Message  
Length, if Outcalling is on or off and Mailbox  
Language  
You must assign a specific extension type and specify other information for each extension  
in the MERLIN Messaging System to assure the enforcement of transfer restrictions and to  
dictate transfer destinations (for example, to a mailbox or Automated Attendant). There  
Fax  
Related Topics  
Access field-by-field instructions for completing the Extension Administration Form  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 2: Extension Administration  
|Print a blank Extension Administration Form | Access field-by-field instructions for completing the  
Extension Administration Form |  
Below is a sample of the form:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 2: Extension Administration  
|Print a blank Extension Administration Form | View a sample, completed Extension  
Administration Form |  
To view form completion instructions, click the fields on the form facsimile below.  
To change a factory setting, cross out the factory setting and fill in the desired  
information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning Form 3: Automated Attendant Planning  
| Form 3a | Form 3b | Form 3c | Form 3d |  
Form 3a  
3a  
Name  
Used to:  
Specify the Schedule Controller and if  
Automated Attendant Schedule  
and Fax Assignment  
applicable the Weekly Business  
Schedule for each Automated  
Attendant  
Indicate the Fax Extension for each  
Automated Attendant  
The Automated Attendant Schedule Options control the Day and Night Service operation of each  
Automated Attendant. The Schedule Options are:  
Schedule Controller – Determines which schedule the Automated Attendants follow the  
Switch Mode, the Weekly Business Schedule or a combination of both.  
Weekly Business Schedule – If the Schedule Controller is set to follow the Weekly Business  
Schedule or to follow both the Switch mode and the Weekly Business Schedule, you must  
specify a Weekly Business Schedule.  
Temporary Schedule – Allows the Automated Attendants to operate in temporary closure or  
temporary open mode. The Temporary Schedule overrides both the Switch mode and the  
Weekly Business Schedule. For each day with a temporary opening or temporary closing  
schedule, you specify the start and end time of the special schedule. During other periods of  
that day, the Automated Attendant operates in the appropriate mode based on its Scheduler  
Controller setting. The Temporary Schedule can be programmed for the current day and/or the  
following six days. It can also be canceled anytime before or during the Temporary Schedule.  
The Temporary Schedule does not carry over from week to week; it expires at the ending time  
you specify on the day for which you created it.  
Automated Attendant Service can also detect a fax tone and route the call to a fax machine extension  
assigned to the Automated Attendant.  
Make a copy of this form for each Automated Attendant.  
Related Topics  
Assignment Form  
| Form 3a | Form 3b | Form 3c | Form 3d |  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 3b  
3b  
Name  
Used to:  
Specify the Day/Night Main menu  
Day/Night Main Menu  
Selector Codes and Selector Code Action.  
Specify the Day/Night Main menu Dial  
0/Time–out Action selections  
The MERLIN Messaging System supports up to four Automated Attendants. The multiple Automated  
Attendant capability is available to accommodate co–located (shared tenant) businesses and/or  
businesses that require more than one Automated Attendant. Each Automated Attendant has its own  
unique:  
Day menu structure and Night menu structure.  
Day Main menu prompt and Night Main menu prompt.  
The MERLIN Messaging Automated Attendant Service answers incoming lines and presents callers  
with a list of pre–administered choices (Selector Codes) contained on the Automated Attendant Main  
menu. During scheduled or temporary open hours, callers hear the Day Main menu. During scheduled  
or temporary closed hours, callers hear the Night Main menu. The Day/Night menu consists of a  
recorded prompt listing menu options and the corresponding digit (Selector Code) the caller presses to  
select each option. Depending on the Touch–Tone input, the Automated Attendant Service performs  
the action (Selector Code Action) specified for the Selector Code:  
Transfer to an extension  
Play another menu of choices (an Automated Attendant Submenu)  
Transfer to a Mailbox  
Related Topics  
Access field–by–field instructions for completing the Day/Night Main menu Form  
| Form 3a | Form 3b | Form 3c | Form 3d |  
Form 3c  
Form Name  
3c Submenu  
Used to:  
Specify submenu Selector Codes and Selector Code Action  
A submenu is a menu is accessed by the caller from an Automated Attendant Day/Night Main menu  
or from another submenu. To program a submenu as a choice on an Automated Attendant Day/Night  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main menu or submenu, assign Selector Action Code 2 to the Selector Code.  
The submenu consists of a recorded prompt listing menu options and the corresponding digit (Selector  
Code) the caller presses to select each option. Depending on the Touch–Tone input, the Automated  
Attendant Service performs the action (Selector Code Action) specified for the selector code:  
Transfer to an extension  
Play another menu of choices (an Automated Attendant submenu)  
Transfer to a Mailbox  
Related Topics  
Access field–by–field instructions for completing the submenu Form  
| Form 3a | Form 3b | Form 3c | Form 3d |  
Form 3d  
3d  
Name  
Used to:  
Create Scripts for announcements, submenus and the  
Day/Night Main menu  
Recording Scripts  
Announcements, submenus and the Day/Night Main menu are part of the Automated Attendant  
Service. Scripts are recordings of up to two minutes that can be created and changed by the System  
Manager only. If the system is in Bilingual mode, then each script consists of one recording in the  
Primary Language and one recording in the Secondary Language.  
Once you create the script, you can associate it with an Automated Attendant announcement,  
submenu or with a Day/Night Main menu.  
You can record up to 99 scripts.  
Scripts can be up to two minutes in length.  
The same scripts can be used for more than one Day/Night Main menu or submenu and with  
more than one Automated Attendant.  
Related Topics  
Access field–by–field instructions for completing the Recording Scripts Form  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning Form 3a: Automated Attendant Schedule and Fax Assignment- Page 1  
instructions for completing the Automated Attendant Schedule and Fax Assignment Form |  
Below is a sample of the completed form:  
| Page 1 | Page 2 | Page 3 | Page 4 |  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning Form 3a: Automated Attendant Schedule and Fax Assignment- Page 1  
completed Automated Attendant Schedule and Fax Assignment Form |  
To view form completion instructions, click the fields on the form facsimile below.  
To change a factory setting, cross out the factory setting and fill in the desired  
information.  
| Page 1 | Page 2 | Page 3 | Page 4 |  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning Form 3b: Day/Night Main menu  
|Print a blank Day/Night Main menu Form | Access field-by-field instructions for completing  
the Day/Night Main menu Form |  
Below is a sample of the completed form:  
| Page 1 | Page 2 | Page 3 | Page 4 |  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning Form 3b: Day/Night Main menu  
|Print a blank Day/Night Main menu Form | View a sample, completed Day/Night Main menu  
Form |  
To view form completion instructions, click the fields on the form facsimile below.  
To change a factory setting, cross out the factory setting and fill in the desired  
information.  
| Page 1 | Page 2 | Page 3 | Page 4 |  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning Form 3c: Submenu  
|Print a blank Sub Menu Form | Access field-by-field instructions for completing the Submenu  
form |  
Below is a sample of the completed form:  
| Page 1 | Page 2 | Page 3 | Page 4 |  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Planning Form 3c: Submenu  
|Print a blank Submenu Form | View a sample, completed Submenu Form |  
To view form completion instructions, click the fields on the form facsimile below.  
To change a factory setting, cross out the factory setting and fill in the desired  
information.  
| Page 1 | Page 2 | Page 3 | Page 4 |  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Planning Form 3d: Recording Scripts  
|Print a blank Recording Scripts Form | Access field-by-field instructions for completing the  
Recording Scripts Form |  
Below is a sample of the completed form:  
| Page 1 | Page 2 | Page 3 | Page 4 |  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning Form 3d: Recording Scripts  
|Print a blank Recording Scripts Form | View a sample, completed Recording Scripts Form |  
To view form completion instructions, click the fields on the form facsimile below.  
To change a factory setting, cross out the factory setting and fill in the desired  
information.  
| Page 1 | Page 2 | Page 3 | Page 4 |  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning Form 4: Line Assignments  
This form and the information below apply to systems that use multiple Automated  
Attendants only. Skip this form if your system uses a single Automated Attendant.  
Note:  
Form Name  
Used to:  
4
Automated Attendant Line Assignments Indicate which Automated Attendant should  
answer each line  
When you are completing this form, the following rules apply:  
If you indicate that a line is to be answered by Automated Attendant 1, no programming is  
needed. Your entry is for record purposes only.  
If you indicate that a line is to be answered by Automated Attendant 2, 3 or 4,  
programming is needed.  
A line can be assigned to only one Automated Attendant.  
A total of 80 lines can be assigned per MERLIN Messaging System.  
Enter the line numbers for each line connected to the Communications System that you  
want answered by an Automated Attendant.  
Related Topics  
Access field-by-field instructions for completing the Line Assignments Form  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning Form 4: Line Assignments  
| Print a blank Line Assignments Form | Access field-by-field instructions for completing the  
Line Assignments Form |  
To view form commpletions instructions, click the fields on the form facsimile below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning Form 4: Line Assignment  
| Print a blank Line Assignments Form | View a sample, completed Line Assignments Form |  
To view form completion instructions, click the fields on the form facsimile below.  
To change a factory setting, cross out the factory setting and fill in the desired  
information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning Form 5: Security Settings  
Form Name  
Security Settings  
Used to:  
Indicate whether or not Transfer Restrictions should be turned  
5
on or off  
Specify a Minimum Password Length for users  
The MERLIN Messaging System includes two features designed to enhance system security by reducing the risk  
of toll fraud and abuse by unauthorized users. They are:  
Transfer Restrictions  
Minimum Password Length  
Related Topics  
Access field-by-field instructions for completing the Security Settings Form  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning Form 5: Security Settings  
|Print a blank Security Settings Form | Access field-by-field instructions for completing the  
Security Settings Form |  
Below is a sample of the completed form:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning Form 5: Security Settings  
|Print a blank Security Settings Form | View a sample, completed Security Settings Form |  
To view form completion instructions, click the fields on the form facsimile below.  
To change a factory setting, cross out the factory setting and fill in the desired  
information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning Form 6: System Group Lists  
Form Name  
System Group Lists  
Used to:  
Create up to ten System Group Lists that allow users to  
address a message to a group of mailboxes  
6
Up to 50 Mailbox Extensions can be included in each System GroupList. A Mailbox Extension  
can be in more than one System Group List.  
Related Topics  
Access field-by-field instructions for completing the System Group Lists Form  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning Form 6: System Group Lists  
|Print a blank System Group Lists Form | Access field-by-field instructions for completing the  
System Group Lists form |  
Below is a sample of the completed form:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning Form 6: System Group Lists  
|Print a blank System Group Lists Form | View a sample, completed System Group Lists Form  
|
To view form completion instructions, click the fields on the form facsimile below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A: MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms  
This section of the MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide contains the MERLIN Messaging  
System Planning Forms. To view and print these forms, you must have an Adobe Acrobat Reader  
plug-in installed on your PC.  
After you have installed the Adobe Acrobat Reader plug-in, refer to the following table for  
viewing/printing instructions.  
If you want to:  
View the forms  
Action  
Planning Form 6: System Group Lists  
Print all of the forms  
Print a specific form  
1. Access the File menu.  
2. Select Print All # pages.  
Click here to view all forms.  
1. Access the File menu.  
2. Select Print.  
3. Click OK.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer  
Planner  
Tel.  
Order  
MERLIN Messaging  
Planning Form 1 - System Parameters  
System Administration Prompt Language  
Language  
English  
Spanish  
French  
Portuguese  
*
System (Primary) Language  
System Language Mode  
Language  
Mode  
1
2
3
4
English  
Monolingual  
Spanish  
French Portuguese*  
**  
Bilingual  
*
Primary Language  
English  
Spanish  
Spanish  
French Portuguese  
Secondary Language English  
French Portuguese*  
System Date & Time  
Date Format  
Time Format  
mm=01-12 dd=01-31 yy=99, 00-37  
hh=00-23 mm=00-59  
mmddyy  
hhmm  
mm=month dd=day yy=year hh=hour mm=minute  
Call Answer Service Operator  
Ext.  
Ext.  
Name  
768  
General Mailbox Owner  
Auto  
Attendant  
Name  
10  
AA1  
AA2  
10  
10  
10  
AA3  
AA4  
Maximum Extension Length  
Maximum Number of Digits  
2
4
3
Factory Setting  
For Release 2 or later.  
*
**  
If you choose Bilingual, the initial setting for the Primary Language is U.S. English and  
the Secondary Language is Spanish.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging  
Planning Form 2 - Extension Administration  
Type  
Code  
1&3  
Type  
Code 3  
only  
All  
Type Code 1 only  
Mailbox  
All Type Codes  
Type Codes  
Mailbox  
Language  
Msg.  
Length  
1 English  
2 Spanish  
3 French  
Size  
Outcalling  
Phone  
Yes=9  
No=6  
Type AA no.  
(1-4)  
Name  
10-Letter Directory Listing  
*
On=9  
Off=6  
5 - 180 min  
20 min  
2 - 60 min  
4 min  
(optional)  
Ext. Code  
(Optional)  
4 Portuguese  
**  
Factory Setting  
For Release 1 and 1.1, a 4-letter Directory Listing is available.  
For Release 2 or later.  
*
**  
Letter Key (for directory listing)  
Type  
Extension Type  
Mailbox  
Transfer-Only  
Automated Attendant  
Fax  
Code  
Capacities  
200  
400  
10  
G = 41  
H = 42  
I = 43  
J = 51  
K = 52  
L = 53  
A = 21  
B = 22  
C = 23  
D = 31  
E = 32  
F = 33  
M = 61 T = 81  
1
2
3
4
N = 62  
O = 63  
P = 71  
Q = 72  
R = 73  
S = 74  
U = 82  
V = 83  
W = 91  
X = 92  
Y = 93  
Z = 94  
4 (1 per Automated Attendant)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging  
Planning Form 3a - Automated Attendant  
Schedule & Fax Assignment  
Automated Attendant Number (1-4)  
Schedule Controller (for Day/Night Service)  
Switch Mode  
Weekly Business Schedule  
Both the Switch Mode and the Weekly Business Schedule  
Weekly Business Schedule  
Specify a weekly schedule if the Automated Attendant follows the  
Weekly Business Schedule or follows both the Switch Mode and the  
Weekly Business Schedule. Only enter times if open. For  
24-hour open operation, set Open to 0000 and Closed to 2359.  
Open  
Closed  
(hhmm)  
Open  
or  
Closed  
(hhmm)  
hh=00-23  
hh=00-23  
Option  
Day  
mm=00-59  
mm=00-59  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Sunday  
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
9
All Days  
FAX Extension:  
= Factory Setting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging  
Planning Form 3b - Day/Night Main Menu  
Day Main Menu  
Night Main Menu  
Automated Attendant Number (1-4)  
Copy this form for each Automated Attendant. Indicate  
whether this is for the Day Main Menu or Night Main Menu,  
and specify the Automated Attendant number.  
Selector Codes  
Extension/Mailbox/  
Selector  
Code  
Action  
Code  
Announcement No./  
Submenu No.  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5
5
5
5
Key  
Action  
Code  
Action  
1
2
3
5
6
Selector Code Transfer  
Play a Submenu  
Play an Announcement  
Direct Extension Transfer  
Mailbox Transfer  
Dial 0/Timeout Action  
Menu  
Selection  
Day Service  
Night Service  
0
Call Answer Service  
Operator  
Call Answer Service  
Operator  
1
2
3
4
General Mailbox  
Disconnect  
Transfer to Ext. ____  
General Mailbox  
Disconnect  
Transfer to Ext. ____  
Transfer to  
Mailbox _____  
Transfer to  
Mailbox _____  
= Factory Setting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging  
Planning Form 3c - Submenu  
Automated Attendant No. (1-4)  
Submenu No. (1-99)  
Copy this form for each Submenu. Specify the Submenu number and  
Automated Attendant number.  
Selector Codes  
Extension/Mailbox/  
Selector  
Code  
Action  
Code  
Announcement No./  
Submenu No.  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Key  
Action  
Code  
Action  
1
2
3
5
6
Selector Code Transfer  
Play a Submenu  
Play an Announcement  
Direct Extension Transfer  
Mailbox Transfer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging  
Planning Form 3d - Recording Script  
Automated Attendant Main Menu:  
Automated Attendant Number (1-4)  
Day Menu  
Night Menu  
Submenu  
Number (1-99)  
Announcement  
Number (1-99)  
Copy this form for each Day Menu Script, Night Menu Script, Submenu Script  
and Announcement. Specify the Announcement Number  
Script (for Day/Night Service, Submenus, Announcements)  
If your system is set up for bilingual operation, record the message in both the  
primary and secondary languages. For Day/Night main Menu only, direct callers  
to press *1 to change the language.  
Primary Language (maximum length = 2 minutes)  
Secondary Language (maximum length = 2 minutes)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging  
Planning Form 4 - Automated Attendant Line Assignments  
If you are using multiple Automated Attendants, indicate  
which Automated Attendant should answer each line.  
You can assign a maximum of 80 lines for all Automated  
Attendants. Any line not assigned to AA2, AA3 or AA4 will  
be handled by AA1.  
Line No.  
AA1  
AA2  
AA3  
AA4  
= Factory Setting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging  
Planning Form 5 - Security Settings  
Transfer Restrictions  
Transfers Restrictions On  
Transfer Restrictions Off  
SECURITY ALERT:  
When Transfer Restrictions is set to On, the MERLIN  
Messaging System transfers callers only to those extensions  
that have been administered by the System Manager. It is  
strongly recommended that you choose the Transfer  
Restrictions On option. Choosing the Transfer Restrictions  
Off option leaves your system vulnerable to toll fraud by  
unauthorized persons.  
Minimum Password Length  
Length  
0-15 digits, 6  
SECURITY ALERT:  
A minimum password length of at least 6 digits is  
strongly recommended. The shorter the minimum  
password length, the more vulnerable your system is to  
toll fraud by unauthorized persons.  
= Factory Setting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging  
Planning Form 6 - System Group Lists  
System  
Group List  
Number  
Members (Name and/or Mailbox Extension)  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
You can put up to fifty extensions in each System Group List.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Contents  
Installation Configuration and Programming  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Installation  
Programming Overview  
Preparing the Communications System  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System  
Programming the Communications System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Installation Configuration and Programming  
Programming Conventions  
System Overview  
Installation  
Programming Overview  
Preparing the Communications System  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System  
Programming the Communications System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
The MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide contains detailed information about the  
MERLIN Messaging System.  
View and print MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms.  
This section, Getting Started, will walk you through a brief explanation of the conventions  
and procedures used in the Online Guide and will help you to use this reference effectively.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customized "Paths" through Information/Procedures  
The MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide provides three customized "paths" through the  
Ongoing Maintenance and Administration  
This content helps you locate and access information based on the tasks you have to perform  
with respect to the system.  
Each path contains:  
Access to general information about the system.  
Detailed information and step-by-step instructions for completing the tasks specific to  
the selected path.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Navigation  
You can move from one topic to another in the Online Guide by activating topic-associated  
hypertext links. This can be done from:  
A topic listed in the Contents Panel on the left side of the screen  
The Technology Bar at the bottom of the screen  
Within the topic text  
The Contents Panel  
The Contents Panel is displayed along the left side of the window. It provides a way for you to  
quickly identify and access the information you need to locate. Because it is displayed in a  
stationary part of the window (that is, it doesn’t change or move), you can easily locate the topic  
you want to view. Note that the arrow pinpoints your current location in the topic listing.  
The Technology Bar  
The Technology Bar located at the lower right-hand corner of the screen contains a number of  
icons. Each icon is responsible for a different navigational action.  
Icon  
Action  
Redisplays the Main menu options in the Contents Panel  
Links to the previous topic in the sequence  
Takes you to the top of the window  
Links to the next topic in the sequence  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
An element that triggers a change on an item (usually a graphic) in a Web page when the mouse passes over it. The change usually signifies that the item is a link to related or  
additional information.  
Pop-Up Windows  
The MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide makes use of pop-up windows and mousovers (through which  
your movement of the cursor over a screen object or image initiates another display or activity) or to provide  
additional information. Typically, pop-up windows and mouseovers contain material that supplements  
information appearing in the main window (for example, a more detailed explanation, a link to a Glossary term, a  
field description, etc.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Button Bar  
The Button Bar is displayed in a non-scrolling panel across the top of the screen. It provides  
access to additional online features and capabilities. To view a feature or access a capability, click  
the associated button. Note that in the case of features displayed in pop-up windows (for example,  
the Glossary), you must close the window before you can proceed.  
Button  
Action  
Redisplays the Main menu  
options in the Contents  
Panel  
Allows you to search for  
information by entering a  
key word  
Links you to the MERLIN  
Messaging System Glossary  
Provides access to the  
online Help feature  
Displays a table containing  
Touch Tones and rules  
which are valid for all  
menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Conventions  
The procedures for programming the MERLIN Messaging System in this Online Guide use  
several conventions to indicate what the steps involve. The conventions are described in the  
following table:  
Typeface Sample  
Meaning  
To select this option, press this imprinted button on the  
console  
GrpCalling  
To select this menu option, press the unlabeled display button  
next to the option  
[nnn]  
Enter the variable information in brackets  
Press this key on the PC  
Press this function key on the PC  
+
On the PC, hold down the first key and press the second key  
Continuation of procedures  
That completes the walk-through of the MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide. To begin  
accessing information related to your selected path, click one of the topics listed in the Contents  
Panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Contents  
Installation Configuration and Programming  
Getting Started  
Introduction  
Services and  
Features  
System Capacities  
System  
Components  
Environmental  
Requirements  
Programmer  
Responsibilities  
Personnel  
Responsibilities  
Features  
Installation  
Programming Overview  
Preparing the Communications System  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System  
Programming the Communications System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PCMCIA Slots  
The left-most PCMCIA slot houses the 2-Port, 4-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, 10-Port, or 12-Port PC  
Card required for operation of the MERLIN Messaging System.  
NOTE: Only the left-most of the two PCMCIA slots can be used. The right-most slot is  
reserved for future use.  
The 2-Port, 4-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, 10-Port, or 12-Port PC Card contains:  
Port licensing data that triggers the activation of the appropriate number of voice messaging  
ports.  
A Remote Maintenance Device (RMD), used for remote access to diagnostic and  
maintenance features of the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Media for performing system backup.  
Introduction  
MERLIN Messaging System Release 2 is an embedded voice messaging system housed in a module (circuit  
pack) that plugs into the switch's carrier. Release 2 is available in a 2-, 4-, 6-, 8-, 10-, or 12-Port configuration.  
Release 1 and 1.1 is available in a 2-, 4-, or 6-Port configuration. For a description of each module component,  
move the mouse pointer over the graphic below.  
Port Status LEDs:  
The port-specific LEDs on the MERLIN Messaging System faceplate indicate the current  
status of each voice messaging port. The possible variations are:  
Not available  
In service and idle  
In service and in use  
Note: The port-specific LEDs that correspond to voice messaging ports are in ascending order  
(that is, from the bottom up).  
RS232 Port:  
This is a serial port used for local access to the MERLIN Messaging System via a PC or  
laptop computer for report, maintenance and administrative purposes. Access to the  
MERLIN Messaging System using the RS-232 port is both login and password protected.  
System Status LED:  
This LED reflects the status of the MERLIN Messaging System. The LED displays a red,  
green or amber light to indicate various stages of system status and readiness (for example,  
booting, self-test failure, system upgrade in progress, etc.).  
Local Area Network (LAN) Connection:  
This port is used to connect the system to a LAN (Release 2 or later).  
Port Status LEDs:  
The port-specific LEDs on the MERLIN Messaging System faceplate indicate the current  
status of each voice messaging port. The possible variations are:  
Not available  
In service and idle  
In service and in use  
Note: The port-specific LEDs that correspond to voice messaging ports are in ascending order  
(that is, from the bottom up).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Allows mailbox owners to:  
Record and send messages.  
Forward and reply to messages.  
Listen to messages.  
Record their names or Personal Greetings.  
Activate a Personal Greeting.  
Change their personal operators.  
Change their passwords.  
Set up Outcalling (if permission provided).  
Create Personal Group Lists.  
Change Call Answer mode.  
Transfer to another extension.  
Allows individuals responsible for programming the MERLIN Messaging System to:  
Administer System Parameters such as System Language mode and System Date  
and Time.  
Administer an extension to be either a Mailbox, Fax, Transfer-Only or Automated  
Attendant Extension.  
Administer up to four Automated Attendants.  
Administer System Security Options.  
Administer System Group Lists (Release 2 or later).  
Perform a System Backup or System Restore.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Answers incoming lines and presents callers with a list of options. Based on callers'  
resulting input, they may be:  
Transferred to an extension.  
Played an informational announcement.  
Transferred to a voice mailbox.  
Presented with a submenu containing additional options.  
The Automated Attendant Service can also detect and route fax calls to a  
predetermined fax extension.  
Functions as a personal answering machine, allowing a caller to:  
Hear the Personal Greeting recorded by the mailbox owner.  
Switch to the alternate language, if the system is configured in Bilingual mode.  
Leave a voice message, if this capability has been programmed by the mailbox  
owner.  
Optionally designate voice message as a priority or private message (Release 2 or  
later).  
Transfer to an operator or to another extension.  
Provides on-site and remote system serviceability functionality, including:  
Terminal-based reporting  
Trouble/fault isolation  
Backup and Restoration  
The MERLIN Messaging System can operate in either Monolingual or Bilingual mode. In  
Monolingual mode, all system prompts are played in one of the following languages:  
U.S. English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
In Milingual mode, the caller can choose to hear prompts in either the Primary or  
Secondary language.  
Services and Features  
For a description of each MERLIN Messaging System service or feature, move the mouse  
pointer over the graphic below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration  
There is one common module (circuit pack) for all six MERLIN Messaging System  
configurations (that is, a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port configuration). A  
2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port PC Card, included with each system, contains  
the following components:  
Port licensing for the system's port configuration (that is, a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port,  
10-port, or 12-port configuration)  
Media for backing up and restoring the system  
A 14.4 kbps Remote Maintenance Device (modem) used for remote diagnostics  
For Release 1 and 1.1, one common module supports three configurations (that is, a 2-port,  
4-port, or 6-port configuration). A 2-port, 4-port, or 6-port PC Card is included with each  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Assignments  
The communications system assigns logical IDs and extensions to each port on the MERLIN  
Messaging System module. The first logical ID and extension assigned to the MERLIN Messaging  
System module is assigned to Port 1, the second to Port 2, etc. The communications system assigns 12  
logical IDs and extensions to the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
In Release 2 or later, if a Message-Waiting Light (MWL) update or Outcalling action needs to be  
performed, the following ports are used:  
Port 2 on a 2-port system  
Port 4 on a 4-port system  
Ports 5 and 6 on a 6-port system  
Ports 7 and 8 on an 8-port system  
Ports 9 and 10 on a 10-port system  
Ports 11 and 12 on a 12-port system  
The Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) is not assigned to a dedicated logical ID and extension.  
The following table defines the Port Assignments for the MERLIN Messaging System Release 2 or  
later.  
Ports  
7
System  
Configuration  
1 2  
3
4
5
6
8
9
10  
11  
12  
2-port  
V V N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E  
4-port  
6-port  
8-port  
10-port  
12-port  
V V V  
V V V  
V V V  
V V V  
V V V  
V
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E  
V
V
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E N/E N/E  
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E  
V
V
V = Voice  
N/E = Not Equipped  
In Release 1 or 1.1, if a Message-Waiting Light (MWL) update or Outcalling action needs to be  
performed, the following ports are used:  
Port 2 on a 2-port system  
Port 4 on a 4-port system  
Port 6 on a 6-port system  
The Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) is assigned to the twelfth logical ID and extension.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System LEDs  
The MERLIN Messaging System module faceplate contains:  
One system status LED  
One LED for each of the voice ports  
The color(s) and status (that is, on, off or blinking) of the LEDs provide information regarding the  
operation of the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
The following table provides a description of the port-level and system status LED display  
variations.  
Display Meaning  
Port-Level LEDs  
Port not available for use (off)  
Port in service and idle (on-hook)  
Port in use (off-hook)  
System Status LED  
System is not powered up or there is a fault condition  
System is in a ready state (off-hook; speaking or recording; receiving Touch Tones)  
There is a self-test failure or system is out-of-service  
There is a self-test failure or system is out-of-service  
System software is being upgraded  
Hard disk is active  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Capacities  
The following table provides a summary of MERLIN Messaging System capacities.  
| System Parameters | Extensions | Automated Attendants | System Security | System Group  
Lists | User Options |  
Feature  
Capacity  
Factory Settings  
System Administration Prompt Language  
U.S. English, Latin American  
U.S. English  
Spanish, Canadian French,  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release  
2 or later)  
System Parameters  
System Language  
U.S. English, Latin American  
Spanish, Canadian French,  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release  
2 or later)  
U.S. English  
Language Mode  
Call Answer Service Operator  
General Mailbox Owners  
Maximum Extension Length  
Message Storage  
Monolingual or Bilingual  
1 maximum  
Monolingual  
Ext. 768  
10 (total)  
2 digits  
N/A  
1 per General Mailbox  
2, 3 or 4 digits  
100 hours  
Extensions  
Mailbox Extensions  
200 maximum for any port  
None  
configuration  
Maximum Number of  
120 messages  
N/A  
Messages per Mailbox  
Mailbox Size  
5 – 180 minutes  
(administered per  
mailbox)  
20 minutes  
Message Length  
Mailbox Language  
2 – 60 minutes  
(administered per  
mailbox)  
4 minutes  
U.S. English, Latin  
American Spanish,  
Canadian French,  
System/Primary  
Language  
Brazilian Portuguese  
(Release 2 or later)  
Outcalling Permission  
On or Off  
400 maximum  
10 maximum  
Off  
None  
None  
Transfer-Only Extensions  
Automated Attendant  
Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax Extensions  
4 (One for each Automated  
Attendant; Fax Extensions  
can be shared by multiple  
Automated Attendants)  
None  
General Mailbox  
4 (one for each Automated  
9991, 9992, 9993, 9994  
Attendant)  
Automated Attendants  
Number of Automated  
4 maximum  
4  
Attendants  
Modes of Operation  
2 (Day mode and Night  
N/A  
mode)  
Submenus  
99 maximum  
None  
Announcements  
Schedule Controller  
99 maximum  
None  
Follow Switch mode, Weekly  
Switch Mode  
Business Schedule or both  
Main menu Prompts,  
Submenu Prompts and  
Announcements  
2 minutes in length maximum  
N/A  
for each  
Number of Line Assignments  
System Security  
80 per Messaging System  
N/A  
Minimum Password Length  
Maximum Password Length  
Transfer Restrictions  
0 –15 digits  
15 digits  
6 digits  
15 digits (fixed)  
On  
On or Off  
System Group Lists  
10 maximum with up to  
50 mailbox extensions in  
each list  
N/A  
User Options  
Outcalling Telephone/Pager  
Numbers (administered by  
user)  
5 maximum  
N/A  
Outcalling Cycles  
1–9  
3  
Outcalling Interval  
Outcalling Schedule  
Outcalling Activation  
5 – 99 minutes  
Range is 0000 – 2359  
15 minutes  
24 hours  
All messages  
Outcalling for all  
messages or priority  
messages only  
Personal Greetings (recorded  
6 maximum  
System Greeting  
by user)  
Group Lists (administered by  
10 maximum with up to 50  
N/A  
user)  
extensions in each list  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Personal Operator  
1 per user  
Call Answer Service  
Operator  
Call Answer Mode  
Record mode or  
Record mode  
answer-only mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Components  
The MERLIN Messaging System module resides in a slot in the communications system carrier.  
One common module supports a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port configuration. (In  
Release 1 or 1.1, the module supports a 2-port, 4-port, or 6-port configuration.)  
Component  
Module  
Description  
LEDs  
One LED indicates system status and one LED  
for each port indicates port status. See the  
MERLIN Messaging System Installation,  
Programming, and Troubleshooting Online  
Guide for more information about the LEDs.  
RS-232 Serial Port  
Used to directly connect a PC or laptop to the  
system.  
Local Area Network  
Used to connect the system to a LAN (Release  
(LAN) connection  
2 or later).  
PCMCIA Slots  
10-port, or 12-port PC card. Only the left-most  
slot should be used.  
Touch-Tone Receivers (TTRs)  
Two TTRs serve as communications system  
resources (an internal component of the  
module).  
PC Card  
The PC Cards provide:  
Remote Maintenance Device (RMD).  
Media for performing system backup.  
2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or  
12-port PC Card  
Port licensing required for the 2-port, 4-port,  
6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port  
configuration.  
Port LEDs  
The port LEDs are single lights which function according to the configuration. For example, in a  
2-port configuration, only the LEDs for Port 1 and Port 2 operate while, in an 8-port configuration,  
LEDs for Ports 1 through 8 operate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Environmental Requirements  
For proper operations, the MERLIN Messaging System installation site must meet the  
environmental requirements described in the table below.  
Condition  
Requirement  
Relative Humidity 15% - 90% non-condensing  
Temperature Range 32° F to 122° F (0° C to 50° C)  
Air Quality  
Dust-free area (preferably in an office environment)  
Environment  
Power Supply  
No exposure to liquids. Avoid areas near drinking fountains, coffee makers, etc.  
For the USA, Canada and other countries that use a USA-type outlet (nominal voltage 117  
VAC), the communications system must have a 391A3 or newer power supply module  
installed in the same carrier in which the MERLIN Messaging System module is installed.  
In countries with nominal voltage of 220 VAC, a 391B2 or newer power supply module is  
required in the same carrier in which the MERLIN Messaging System module is installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installer and Programmer Responsibilities  
The individual installing and programming the MERLIN Messaging System is responsible for  
the following tasks:  
Installing the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System module to provide the services specified  
by the customer.  
Programming the communications system to support MERLIN Messaging System  
operation.  
Reviewing configuration reports to ensure that all system parameters, line assignments,  
Automated Attendant menus and Announcements are correct and current.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Company Personnel Responsibilities  
Before the MERLIN Messaging System is programmed, company personnel should be  
designated to serve in the following support roles:  
General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Manager Responsibilities  
The System Manager is responsible for performing the following routine maintenance tasks:  
Maintaining Voice Mailboxes, for example:  
Adding and deleting voice mailboxes.  
Resetting (initializing) voice mailbox passwords when forgotten.  
Changing user's mailbox language.  
Maintaining Transfer-Only, Automated Attendant and Fax Extensions.  
Changing Automated Attendant Menus, Announcements and Line Assignments to  
reflect changes in line assignment, personnel, company operations or company services.  
Maintaining the Automated Attendant Schedule to assure that the appropriate  
Automated Attendant menus and announcements are played in connection with holidays  
and temporary company closings or openings.  
Maintaining System Parameters to make system-wide changes (for example, changing  
date and time, the Call Answer Service Operator extension or General Mailbox  
Owners).  
Maintaining System Security by responding to user inquiries and by taking measures  
to prevent toll fraud and to safeguard the contents of mailboxes.  
Performing System Backups periodically or when changes are made to the MERLIN  
Messaging System.  
Maintaining Directory Listings to reflect changes in personnel.  
Reviewing Configuration Reports to ensure that all system parameters, line  
assignments, Automated Attendant menus and Announcements are current and correct.  
General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Call Answer Service (CAS) Operator Responsibilities  
In Automated Attendant Service, when the Dial 0/Timeout Action is set to CAS  
Operator and:  
Caller presses  
.
Caller makes no selection.  
Caller presses  
Caller presses  
while using the directory to transfer.  
, then  
to transfer.  
In Voice Mail Service:  
User presses  
, then  
.
Caller presses  
while using the directory to transfer.  
In Call Answer Service:  
Caller presses  
or  
, then  
while the greeting is playing and the  
extension does not have a Personal Operator.  
Mailbox is in Answer-Only mode without a Personal Operator and caller presses  
or  
, then  
during the five-second timeout following the greeting.  
Caller presses  
or  
, then before or after leaving a message in a  
mailbox that does not have a Personal Operator.  
Caller presses while using the directory to transfer.  
The factory setting for the Call Answer Service Operator is 768. It is recommended that you do  
not change the factory setting.  
General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Mailbox Owner Responsibilities  
A person designated as a General Mailbox Owner is responsible for forwarding messages left  
in the General Mailbox to the intended user's mailbox.  
Action has been set to "Record a Message in the General Mailbox" and the caller does any of  
the following:  
The caller presses  
from an Automated Attendant Main menu, Submenu or an  
Announcement.  
The caller makes no Touch-Tone response to an Automated Attendant Main menu or  
Submenu.  
The caller presses  
while using the directory to transfer.  
Call Answer Service Operator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security Features  
The MERLIN Messaging System includes security features to help protect your system from  
toll fraud abuse. These features include:  
A Transfer Restriction capability that allows the System Manager to restrict call transfer  
destinations only to those extensions administered by the System Manager.  
A Minimum Password Length setting that allows the System Manager to choose a  
minimum length for the passwords of users' voice mailboxes. A Minimum Password  
Length setting of at least six digits is recommended.  
Password Protection for Mailboxes and the Diagnostic and Maintenance Interface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Installation Configuration and Programming  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Installation  
Installing the MERLIN Messaging System module  
Programming Overview  
Preparing the Communications System  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System  
Programming the Communications System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
This section describes the procedure for installing the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
Be sure to review Preparing for Installation and Communication System Hardware  
Requirements before you begin the MERLIN Messaging System installation process.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preparing for Installation  
Before you begin the installation process:  
Collect the applicable communications System Planning Forms from the System  
Manager.  
Confirm that MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms 1 through 6 have been  
completed.  
Verify that the installation site meets the applicable environmental requirements.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communications System Hardware Requirements  
The following communications system equipment is required to install Release 1.1 or Release  
2 of the MERLIN Messaging System:  
A properly functioning MERLIN LEGEND Communications System, Release 7.0 with  
a 391A3 or newer power supply module installed in the same carrier as the MERLIN  
Messaging System module.  
or  
A properly functioning MERLIN MAGIX Integrated System, Release 1.1.0 or later with  
a 491D1 or newer power supply module installed in the same carrier as the MERLIN  
Messaging System module.  
The 391A1 and 391A2 power supply modules cannot be installed in the same carrier as  
the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
Note:  
One available slot in the communications system carrier.  
The communications system assigns logical IDs and extensions to each port on the  
MERLIN Messaging System module. The first logical ID and extension assigned to the  
Note: MERLIN Messaging System module is assigned to Port 1, the second to Port 2, etc.  
The communications system assigns 12 logical IDs and extensions to the MERLIN  
Messaging System module.  
In Release 2 or later, if a Message-Waiting Light (MWL) update or Outcalling action  
needs to be performed, the following ports are used:  
Port 2 on a 2-port system  
Port 4 on a 4-port system  
Ports 5 and 6 on a 6-port system  
Ports 7 and 8 on an 8-port system  
Ports 9 and 10 on a 10-port system  
Ports 11 and 12 on a 12-port system  
The Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) is not assigned to a dedicated logical ID and  
extension.  
In Release 1 or 1.1, if a Message-Waiting Light (MWL) update or Outcalling action  
needs to be performed, the following ports are used:  
Port 2 on a 2-port system  
Port 4 on a 4-port system  
Port 6 on a 6-port system  
The Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) is assigned to the twelfth logical ID and  
extension.  
( Release 1 or 1.1 Port Assignments, Release 2 Port Assignments.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For MERLIN LEGEND System Maintenance, System Inventory and System Setup reports, the  
MERLIN Messaging System module is reported as an 008OPT Module. For the same reports  
on an MERLIN MAGIX system, the MERLIN Messaging System is reported as Msg.  
For module replacement and unit load requirements, refer to System Planning for the  
communications system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the MERLIN Messaging System Module  
You must install the MERLIN Messaging System module in the first available slot  
following the installation of other modules in the communications system carrier.  
The information in this section is intended for qualified technicians only.  
To prevent damage to the MERLIN Messaging System, you must power down the  
communications system before installing or removing the MERLIN Messaging  
System module. Do NOT perform a "hot swap."  
To install the MERLIN Messaging System module:  
Step Procedure  
Comments  
1
Install the PC Card containing port licensing  
information in the left-most PCMCIA slot.  
2
3
Power down the communications system.  
Be sure to disconnect the power cord.  
Install the MERLIN Messaging System module A damaged carrier or module must be  
in the first empty slot in the communications  
system carrier, as follows:  
replaced.  
Be sure that the connector on the  
module mates properly with the  
connector on the carrier.  
For MERLIN LEGEND:  
1. Lower the module onto the rod on the top  
of the carrier in the appropriate slot.  
To avoid damage, do not force the  
module. If the module does not insert  
easily, press the bottom-rear locking  
tab, remove the module and inspect  
the module and carrier for damage or  
obstruction. If there is no damage and  
no obstruction, re-insert the module.  
2. Firmly push the module into the carrier  
until it locks into place.  
For MERLIN MAGIX:  
1. Align the circuit board guides inside the  
carrier, (top and bottom) into the slot.  
2. Make sure the connector on the module  
mates properly with the connector on the  
carrier.  
3. Firmly push the module into the carrier  
until it locks into place.  
4
Power up the communications system.  
Be sure to power up the carrier  
containing the processor module last.  
Program the communications system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Installation Configuration and Programming  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Installation  
Communications System  
MERLIN Messaging System  
Preparing the Communications System  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System  
Programming the Communications System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communications System  
To program the communications system, you can use either:  
A system programming console  
or  
A PC running WinSPM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging System  
To perform both administrative and user MERLIN Messaging System programming, you use a  
Touch-Tone telephone. In release 2 or later, administrative programming can also be  
performed locally from a PC or laptop running the MERLIN Messaging Release 2 System  
Administration software. This Online Guide describes how to administer the MERLIN  
Messaging System using a Touch-Tone telephone. See the MERLIN Messaging Release 2  
System Administration Guide for information on administering the MERLIN Messaging  
System using the system administration software.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Installation Configuration and Programming  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Installation  
Programming Overview  
Introduction  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System  
Programming the Communications System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
These procedures are performed on the communications system. You must complete them  
after the MERLIN Messaging System module has been installed, but before you program the  
MERLIN Messaging System.  
Perform the following procedures to prepare the communications system prior to programming  
Enable rotary signaling for MERLIN Messaging System voice ports.  
If you require more detailed information about communications system programming or  
features, please refer to your communications system documentation. Communications  
system programming can be performed using the system programming console or a PC  
running WinSPM.  
Note:  
Enabling Rotary Signaling  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Assigning Lines to the Voice Port(s) Used for Outcalling  
If the communications system is operating in Key Mode and Outcalling is used, you must assign one or  
more outside lines to the MERLIN Messaging System ports used for Outcalling. You must also set the lines  
to No Ring, as described in the next procedure, to ensure proper operation. These procedures are not  
necessary if the communications system is operating in the Hybrid/PBX mode.  
To add an outside line to the extension used for Outcalling in Key mode:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
[any key]  
2
3
4
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Select Lines/Trunks  
Lines/Trunks  
Enter the extension number you want [nnn]  
to program  
[nnn]  
Enter  
5
Add the Outcalling Line Assignments Press line button or console  
by selecting each line button and  
turning on the green  
or  
function key  
+
Message-Waiting light  
6
7
Press Exit/Back when you have  
finished adding the Outcalling lines  
to that extension  
Exit/Back  
Return to System Programming menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Setting the Outcalling Lines to No Ring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating a Calling Group and Assigning Group Members  
You must create a MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group and assign the group members (MERLIN  
Messaging System ports).  
To create a Calling Group and assign group members:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
[any key]  
2
3
4
5
6
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
/
Display next menu page  
Select Group Calling  
Select Members  
Grp Calling  
Members  
Enter the extension of the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
Enter  
7
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnnn]  
Enter  
8
9
Repeat Step 7 for all active MERLIN  
Messaging System voice ports  
Confirm that all members are entered  
in the correct order  
10  
11  
12  
Return to the Group Calling menu  
Select Hunt Type  
Exit/Back  
Hunt Type  
Enter the extension of the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
Enter  
13  
Specify Linear Hunt Group  
Linear  
Enter  
14  
15  
16  
Display next menu page  
Select Group Type  
/
Group Type  
Enter the extension of the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
17  
Select Integrated VMI  
Integ VMI  
Enter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
18  
Return to the System Programming  
menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Setting the Outcalling Lines to No Ring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enabling Rotary Signaling  
In order for the MERLIN Messaging System to be able to transfer calls, turn the Message-Waiting Lights On and Off,  
and perform Outcalling, all MERLIN Messaging System voice ports must be programmed as rotary enabled.  
To enable rotary signaling:  
Step Programming task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
[any key]  
2
3
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Display third page of menu  
/
/
4
5
Select Rotary Enable  
RotaryEnabl  
Enter the extension number of the  
MERLIN Messaging System voice port  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
7
Repeat Step 5 for all voice ports  
Make sure all MERLIN Messaging  
System voice ports are rotary enabled.  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
8
Return to the System Programming  
menu  
Setting the Outcalling Lines to No Ring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Outcalling Lines to No Ring  
If the communications system is operating in Key Mode and Outcalling is used, the outside line(s)  
assigned to the MERLIN Messaging System voice port(s) that are used for Outcalling must be set to No  
Ring. This procedure is not necessary if the communications system is operating in the Hybrid/PBX mode.  
For MERLIN Messaging System Release 2 or later, the voice port(s) used for Outcalling are Port 2 on a  
2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port system, Ports 5 and 6 on a 6-port system, Ports 7 and 8 on an 8-port  
system, Ports 9 and 10 on a 10-port system, or Ports 11 and 12 on a 12-port system. For Release 1 or 1.1,  
the voice port used for Outcalling is Port 2 on a 2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port system, or Port 6 on a  
6-port system.  
Setting the Outcalling Line to No Ring:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Display next page of menu  
/
Cntr-Prg  
Select Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Program Ext  
4
5
Select Program Extension  
Enter the extension you want to  
program  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Start  
6
7
Start Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Select the line/feature button  
representing the Outcalling line  
Press button on console  
or  
function key, then  
or  
+
8
Select Ring Options for all lines  
or  
ListFeature  
/
/
/
Ring Options  
All Lines  
Enter  
No Ring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enter  
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
9
Return to the System  
Programming menu  
Creating a Calling Group and Assigning Group Members  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Installation Configuration and Programming  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Installation  
Programming Overview  
Preparing the Communications System  
Backing Up the System  
Programming the Communications System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
The information in this section should be used by the individual responsible for programming  
Messaging System Module).  
programming (see the introduction to Preparing the Communications System).  
It is recommended that programming tasks be performed in a certain sequence. As you  
complete a task, go on to the next task in the sequence.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Global Commands and Rules  
The Touch Tones and rules indicated in the table below are valid for all programming menus  
and/or system service, unless specifically overridden. You can display the Global Commands and  
Rules table at any time by clicking Global Commands on the button bar.  
Input: Result:  
Transfer to Operator  
(From Call Answer Service and Automated Attendant Service but not from a  
programming menu)  
Back up one menu level  
Play the current prompt again  
From the System Administration (SA) Main menu, go to the SA Activity Menu  
From any SA submenu, go to the SA Main menu  
From Call Answer Service, go to the Voice Mail Service login prompt  
From Automated Attendant Service, go to the Voice Mail Service login  
prompt  
From a Voice Mail Service submenu, go to the Voice Mail Service Activity  
menu  
Hear prompt for transfering to an extension  
Exit from the system (you can also hang up)  
None  
For an Automated Attendant Main menu or submenu, the system handles  
the call based on the Automated Attendant's Dial 0/Timeout action  
For an Automated Attendant announcement, the system will time out after 5  
seconds and disconnect  
For all other menus or prompts, the System will timeout after 5 seconds if  
no response to a voice prompt made. After 3 timeouts, the system will  
disconnect  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Initially Logging into System Administration  
All MERLIN Messaging System programming procedures are performed via the System  
Administration extension. The first time you log in to MERLIN Messaging System Administration, you  
are prompted to change your password. This section describes the procedure for accessing MERLIN  
Messaging System Administration for the first time.  
Step  
1
Programming Task  
Touch - Tone Input  
Dial the Calling Group extension for the MERLIN Messaging System  
[nnn]  
Enter the System Administration extension  
At the password prompt, press  
2
3
The first time you log in, you are prompted to  
change the password. Until you create it, the  
Note: System Administration password is not set.  
Enter new password  
4
5
6
[nnnnnn]  
[nnnnnn]  
Re-enter new password  
Select System Administration  
For system security purposes, the actual System  
Administration option is not heard on the System  
Administration Activity menu. You must select it, even  
Note:  
though it is not heard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the System Administration Prompt Language  
The System Administration Prompt Language is the language you hear when you program the  
languages supported by MERLIN Messaging System, regardless of the mode or languages  
identified as the System Language.  
Select a language even if you want the System Administration  
Prompt Language to remain in U.S. English. This will ensure a  
change to the System Language Mode or System Language  
does not affect the System Administration Prompt Language.  
Note:  
Step  
1
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
Dial the calling group extension for MERLIN  
Messaging System  
[nnn]  
2
Enter System Administration extension  
3
4
5
Enter System Administration password  
[nnnnnn]  
Select System Administration Prompt Language  
Choose one of the following:  
U.S. English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming System Parameters  
This section describes the procedures for setting the System Date and Time and for  
programming MERLIN Messaging System parameters. Note that some parameters have  
pre-programmed factory settings. You do not have to re-program these parameters if they  
Refer to a completed copy of System Planning Form 1–System Parameters for the  
parameter settings that apply to your system.  
Remember that you must still set the System Date and Time, regardless of your  
acceptance of system parameter factory settings.  
Note:  
Programming Maximum Extension Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming System Language Mode and System Language  
The System Language is the language callers hear. It can be set to one of four languages: U.S.  
English, Latin American Spanish, Canadian French, or Portuguese Spanish (Release 2 or later). The  
System Language Mode can be set to Monolingual or Bilingual. When the System Language Mode  
is set to Monolingual, callers hear system prompts in one of the four languages (the language that is  
programmed as the System Language). When the System Language Mode is set to Bilingual, callers  
hear system prompts in two of the four languages. The first language the caller hears is the Primary  
Language. The Secondary Language is the alternate language the caller can hear by pressing  
When a system is in Bilingual mode, the user includes in their personal greeting instructions for the  
.
caller to press  
to hear system prompts in the alternate language.  
The System Language Mode and System Language apply  
to all Automated Attendants.  
Note:  
The MERLIN Messaging System factory settings for  
System Language Mode and System Language are  
Parameters for the System Language Mode and System  
Language that applies to your site.  
Setting System Language Mode  
The factory-set System Language Mode for a new system is Monolingual. Use the following  
procedure to change the Language Mode to Bilingual, if required.  
To program the System Language Mode:  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Parameters  
3
4
5
Select System Language Mode  
Select Language Mode  
Select Bilingual  
Setting System Language  
The factory-set System Language for a new Monolingual system is U.S. English. If the Language  
Mode has been changed to Bilingual, the default Primary Language is U.S. English and the default  
Secondary Language is Latin American Spanish. Use the following procedure to:  
Change the System Language in a Monolingual system.  
Change the inital Primary and/or Secondary Language(s) in a Bilingual system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step  
1
Touch-Tone Imput  
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
2
3
4
5
Select System Parameters  
Select System Language Mode  
Select System Language  
For Monolingual  
For Bilingual  
Programming Maximum Extension Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For Monolingual Mode  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Select option:  
Listen to language  
Accept language setting (Monolingual  
or  
procedure is complete)  
Modify language  
Choose one of the following:  
U.S. English  
(Select one:)  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
confirm  
cancel  
or  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For Bilingual Mode  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Choose one of the following:  
Primary Language  
Secondary Language  
If finished  
or  
or  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to language  
Accept Language setting  
or  
Modify language  
Choose one of the following:  
U.S. English  
(Select one:)  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
confirm  
cancel  
or  
8
9
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for secondary language  
End language selection  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming System Date and Time  
You must set the system date and time. These parameters cannot be set independently of each other; both date and  
time must be set.  
To program the System Date and Time:  
Step  
1
Touch-Tone Input  
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
2
3
4
Select System Parameters  
Select System Date and Time  
Choose one of the following:  
Enter date  
[mmddyy]  
or  
Example: February 26, 2000 = 022600  
Keep current date  
5
Choose one of the following:  
Enter time (24-hour clock)  
[hhmm]  
or  
Example: 3:45PM = 1545  
Keep current time  
6
Choose one of the following:  
Approve  
or  
Re-enter  
(Return to Step 4)  
Programming Maximum Extension Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Call Answer Service Operator Extension  
transferred in a number of situations. Click here for a list of CAS Operator transfer criteria.  
The factory setting for the Call Answer Service Operator is 768.  
It is recommended that you do not change the factory setting.  
Note:  
Refer to System Planning Form 1 – System Parameters for the CAS Operator Extension  
identified for your site.  
To program the CAS Operator extension:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Parameters  
Select Call Answer Service Operator  
Enter Call Answer Service Operator extension  
[nnn]  
Programming Maximum Extension Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming General Mailbox Owner(s)  
The MERLIN Messaging System provides four General Mailboxes — one for each Automated Attendant.  
The General Mailbox Owner is the extension whose Message-Waiting Light is turned on whenever a message is  
placed in the General Mailbox. The factory setting for the General Mailbox Owner is Extension 10. You can  
General Mailboxes.  
Refer to System Planning Planning Form 1 – System Parameters for the General Mailbox  
Owner extension(s) identified for your site.  
To program the General Mailbox Owner(s):  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Parameters  
Select General Mailbox Owner  
Enter Automated Attendant number  
-
5
6
Enter General Mailbox Owner's extension  
[nnn]  
Repeat Steps 3–5 for each Automated Attendant  
Programming Call Answer Service Operator Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Maximum Extension Length  
Maximum Extension Length refers to the maximum number of digits (two, three or four) in the dial plan. The  
factory setting is two digits. The MERLIN Messaging System transfers calls:  
When the number of digits entered by the caller equals the Maximum Extension Length.  
After the caller presses digits and  
, indicating they have finished entering an extension.  
After the caller has entered digits and the 5-second time-out period has expired.  
Refer to System Planning Form 1 – System Parameters for the maximum Extension Length  
identified for your system.  
To program the Maximum Extension Length:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Parameters  
Select Maximum Extension Length  
Enter maximum number of digits  
or  
or  
Programming General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Extensions  
You must assign a specific extension type to each extension in the MERLIN Messaging System  
to assure the enforcement of transfer restrictions and to designate transfer destinations (that is, to  
a mailbox, Automated Attendant, fax or system extension).  
Automated Attendant  
Fax  
Programming an extension also requires you to identify the phone status for the extension. The  
phone status for an extension affects the way that a call is routed within the MERLIN Messaging  
System when the caller requests to be transfered to that extension, as illustrated below:  
Telephone? Call Handling  
Outcome  
Incoming calls are transferred by the Calls are transferred to the extension  
MERLIN Messaging System to the  
applicable extension  
Yes  
No  
Incoming calls transferred by the  
MERLIN Messaging System stay in Service or Automated Attendant Service  
the MERLIN Messaging System for the extension  
Calls are routed directly to Call Answer  
Transfer-Only and Fax extensions always have a telephone associated with the extension.  
Note:  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 2 – Extension Administration for  
information that applies to your system.  
Assigning Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Assigning a Mailbox Extension  
You can assign up to 200 user mailboxes. When you program a Mailbox extension, you are  
prompted to:  
Identify the phone status.  
Program the Mailbox Language.  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 2 – Extension Administration for the  
Mailbox Assignment information identified for your site.  
To assign a Mailbox extension:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
Assign a mailbox to the extension  
Choose one of the following:  
If a telephone is associated with this extension  
If a telephone is not associated with this extension  
or  
6
Choose one of the following:  
To program optional features for this extension, go to the  
appropriate step as follows:  
Directory Listing or Recorded Name  
Message Length and Mailbox Size  
Outcalling Permission  
Mailbox Language  
To delete this extension,  
then choose one of the following:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Confirm  
Cancel  
If finished administering this extension  
Note:  
Change the phone status  
These procedures are covered in Path 3, Ongoing Maintenance and  
Administration, "Managing the MERLIN Messaging System."  
Assigning a Fax Machine Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program Directory Listing or Recorded Name (optional procedure):  
Step Programming Task  
Optional Steps  
Touch-Tone Input  
7
Select Record Name, then choose one of the following:  
Listen to name  
If finished  
Record name, then after recording, press  
and choose  
[record name]  
one of the following:  
or  
or  
or  
Approve Name  
Play back recorded name  
Re-record name  
Delete name just recorded  
If finished recording a name, return to Step 6.  
8
Select Directory Listing, then choose one of the following:  
Touch-Tones (for Release 1 or 1.1, enter up to first four  
letters of name) then choose one of the following:  
Approve  
Re-enter  
Exit without changes  
[nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn  
nn]  
If finished administering Directory Listing  
or  
or  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program Message Length and Mailbox Size (optional procedure):  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
Optional Steps  
Change Message Length and Mailbox Size  
9
Choose one of the following:  
Enter Maximum Message Length  
[nn]  
or  
or  
Skip Maximum Message Length  
If finished  
Choose one of the following:  
Enter Mailbox Size, then  
Approve  
[nn]  
Re-enter  
Skip Mailbox Size, then  
Approve  
Re-enter  
If finished  
If finished administering Message Length and Mailbox Size  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program Outcalling (optional procedure):  
Step  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
Optional Steps  
10  
For Outcalling, choose one of the following:  
Turn Outcalling On  
or  
Turn Outcalling Off  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program Mailbox Language (optional procedure):  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
Optional Steps  
11 For Mailbox Language, choose one of the  
following:  
Listen to current Mailbox Language  
If finished  
Modify Mailbox Language and choose one  
of the following:  
or  
or  
or  
U.S. English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or  
later)  
or  
After modifying the Mailbox Language:  
Confirm  
Cancel  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning a Transfer-Only Extension  
You can assign up to 400 Transfer-Only extensions. Transfer-Only extensions do not require a  
administer a Directory Listing and/or Recorded Name.  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 2 – Extension Administration for the  
Transfer-Only Assignment information identified for your site.  
To assign a Transfer-Only extension:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
2
3
4
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
Assign Transfer-Only permission to this extension  
5
Choose one of the following:  
Directory Listing or Recorded Name  
Delete this extension  
Confirm  
Cancel  
If finished  
The Assigning Transfer-Only Extensions feature also allows you to delete the extension.  
This procedure is covered in Path 3 - Ongoing Maintenance and Administration,  
Note: "Managing the MERLIN Messaging System."  
Assigning Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To program Directory Listing or Recorded Name (optional procedure):  
Step Programming Task  
Optional Steps  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Select Record Name, then choose one of the following:  
Listen to name  
If finished  
Record name; then after recording, press  
and choose  
[record name]  
one of the following:  
Approve name  
or  
or  
or  
Play back recorded name  
Re-record name  
Delete name just recorded  
If finished recording a name  
7
Select Directory Listing, then choose one of the following:  
Enter first four letters of name, using Touch Tones then  
choose one of the following:  
Approve  
[nn nn nn nn]  
Re-enter  
or  
Exit without changes  
If finished administering Directory Listing  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning Automated Attendant Extensions  
You can assign up to 10 Automated Attendant extensions. An Automated Attendant extension is  
one that sends the caller to one of the four Automated Attendants. You can also assign a new  
no-telephone associated. You can also administer a Directory Listing or Recorded Name.  
Refer to System Planning Form 2 – Extension Administration for the Automated Attendant  
Assignment information identified for your site.  
To assign an Automated Attendant extension:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
[1–4]  
Assign Automated Attendant to extension  
5
6
Enter Automated Attendant number  
Choose one of the following:  
If a telephone is associated with this extension  
If a telephone is not associated with this extension  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Program Directory Listing or Recorded Name  
Delete this extension  
Confirm  
or  
Cancel  
If finished administering the extension  
Assigning Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To program Directory Listing or Recorded Name (optional procedure):  
Step Programming Task  
Optional Steps  
Touch-Tone Input  
8
Select Record Name, then choose one of the following:  
Listen to name  
If finished  
Record name; then after recording, press  
and choose  
[record name]  
one of the following:  
or  
or  
or  
Approve Name  
Play back recorded name  
Re-record name  
Delete name just recorded  
If finished recording a name  
9
Select Directory Listing, the choose one of the following:  
Touch-Tones (for Release 1 or 1.1, enter up to first four  
letters of name) Then choose one of the following:  
Approve  
Re-enter  
[nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn  
nn]  
Exit without changes  
or  
If finished administering Directory Listing  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning a Fax Extension  
You can assign up to four Fax extensions, one for each Automated Attendant. If an Automated  
Attendant has been assigned a fax extension, when an incoming fax call is detected by the  
Automated Attendant, it routes the call to the fax machine. You can administer a Directory  
Listing or Recorded Name for a Fax extension.  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 2 – Extension Administration for the  
fax Assignment information identified for your site.  
To assign a fax machine to an extension:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
Assign a fax machine to the extension  
Choose one of the following:  
Program Directory Listing or Recorded Name  
Delete this extension  
If this fax extension is assigned to an  
Automated Attendant you must do one  
of the following:  
Note:  
Confirm  
Cancel  
If finished  
Assigning Automated Attendant Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To program Directory Listing or Recorded Name (optional procedure):  
Step Programming Task  
Optional Steps  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Select Record Name  
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to name  
If finished  
[record name]  
Record name; then after recording, press  
and choose  
one of the following:  
or  
Approve Name  
or  
or  
Play back recorded name  
Re-record name  
Delete name just recorded  
If finished recording a name  
7
Select Directory Listing  
Touch-Tones (for Release 1 or 1.1, enter up to first four  
letters of name) Then choose one of the following:  
Approve  
[nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn  
nn]  
Re-enter  
Exit without changes  
If finished administering Directory Listing  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Automated Attendant(s)  
The MERLIN Messaging Automated System Attendant Service (AAS) answers calls and  
presents callers with a list of options from which to choose, the options are presented via  
menus and submenus. This section of the Online Guide provides instructions for performing  
the programming tasks required to enable this functionality.  
To lessen the risk of Toll Fraud abuse, Automated Attendants should be  
programmed to give callers access to system extensions only.  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms 3a–3d for the site-specific  
information you need to complete the following programming tasks.  
Note:  
Assigning a Fax Extension to an Automated Attendant  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming the Day and Night Main menus  
The Automated Attendant Day Main menu is heard by individuals calling into the MERLIN  
Messaging System during business hours. The Night Main menu is heard when the business is  
closed. Typically, from a Day or Night Main menu, callers are given the opportunity to:  
Transfer to an extension, calling group or mailbox  
Play a submenu  
Play an informational announcement  
Select a Day menu and a Night menu  
Listen to the menu prompts and menu definitions  
Modify the menu  
Record new menu prompts  
Save menu definitions  
To program the Automated Attendant Day or Night Main menu:  
Touch-Tone Input  
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
1
2
3
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
or  
4
Choose an option:  
Program Day Main menu  
Program Night Main menu  
5
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to the menu  
Modify the menu  
Exit Main menu programming  
Procedure  
Programming Schedule Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Assigning a Fax Extension to an Automated Attendant  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To listen to the Main menu prompts:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to the menu prompt  
If system is Bilingual:  
Listen to Primary Language prompt  
Listen to Secondary Language prompt  
If finished  
Listen to menu definition  
If finished  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To modify the Main menu  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Enter Selector Code, then choose one of the  
following:  
[1 -9 ]  
Modify Selector Code, then choose one  
of the following Selector Code Actions:  
Selector Code transfer  
Play submenu  
+ ext. number +  
or  
+ submenu number +  
+ announce number +  
or  
or  
Play announcement  
Direct extension transfer  
Mailbox transfer  
or  
Delete Selector Code  
+ mailbox ext. number +  
or  
If finished (exit without changing  
or  
Selector Code)  
Keep current Selector Code. To modify  
another Selector Code, return to beginning of  
Step 7.  
Go on to Step 8 (Required)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To record a new Main menu prompt  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
8
Choose one of the following:  
Bilingual mode (Go to Step 9)  
Monolingual mode  
[record prompt]  
Record a new prompt  
Approve prompt  
Listen to prompt  
Re-record prompt  
Delete recording  
Use existing menu prompt and save menu  
definition changes. For Monolingual mode,  
procedure is finished.  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To record a new Main menu prompt (Bilingual mode):  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
9
Choose one of the following:  
Primary Language  
or  
Secondary Language  
or  
Use existing menu prompt and save menu  
definition changes  
10 Choose one of the following:  
Record a new prompt  
[record a new prompt]  
Approve prompt  
Listen to prompt  
Re-record prompt  
Delete recording  
11 Repeat record process for other language (go to  
Step 9).  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating Submenus  
The Automated Attendant Day and Night Main menus provide callers with nine options (or  
choices). If you need to provide more than nine options, you must create a submenu from which a  
caller can select additional options.  
The MERLIN Messaging System allows up to 99 submenus shared among all Automated  
Attendants. A submenu:  
Can be assigned to one or more Automated Attendants.  
Can be up to two minutes in length.  
Uses the same Dial 0/Timeout Action defined for the Day or Night Main menu to which it  
is assigned.  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 3c - Submenu for the  
information you need to create submenus  
NOTE:  
To create a submenu:  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select Submenus  
[1-4]  
Enter submenu number  
[1-99]  
6
Choose an option:  
Create a submenu  
Cancel  
Procedures  
Assigning a Fax Extension to an Automated Attendant  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To create a submenu:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to submenu  
Modify submenu  
Delete a submenu, then choose one of the  
following:  
Confirm deletion  
Cancel deletion  
If finished  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To listen to a submenu:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
8
Choose one of the following:  
If the system is in Monolingual mode, listen to submenu  
prompt:  
If system is in Bilingual mode:  
Listen to submenu prompt in Primary Language  
Listen to submenu prompt in Secondary Language  
Listen to submenu definition  
If finished  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To modify a submenu:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
9
Choose one of the following:  
Enter Selector Code, then choose one of the  
[1-9]  
following:  
Modify Selector Code, then choose one of  
the following Selector Code Actions:  
+ ext. number +  
or  
Selector Code transfer  
Play submenu  
+ submenu number +  
+ announce number +  
or  
or  
or  
Play announcement  
Direct extension transfer  
Mailbox transfer  
+ mailbox ext. number +  
or  
Delete Selector Code  
To accept current selector code action  
If finished modifying this Selector  
Code  
If you want to modify another selector Code  
action, return to the beginning of Step 9  
To save menu changes go to Step 10 (Required)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To record a submenu prompt:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
Bilingual mode (go to Step 11)  
Monolingual mode, choose one of the  
following:  
[record prompt]  
Record a new prompt, choose one of  
the following:  
Approve prompt  
Listen to prompt  
Re-record prompt  
Delete recording  
Use the existing submenu prompt  
and save any menu definition  
changes  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To record a submenu prompt (Bilingual mode):  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
11 Choose one of the following:  
Primary Language  
Secondary Language  
Save menu definition and submenu prompt  
12 Record a submenu prompt:  
[record prompt]  
Approve prompt  
Listen to prompt  
Re-record prompt  
Delete recording  
13 Repeat record process for other language. (Go to Step  
11).  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating Announcements  
Announcements are recorded messages that callers hear when they make specific selections from  
the MERLIN Messaging System menus and/or submenus.  
The MERLIN Messaging System allows up to 99 announcements shared among all  
Automated Attendants.  
The same announcement can be used for any or all menus or submenus and for all  
Automated Attendants  
A single announcement can be up to two minutes in length.  
The factory setting is "Announcement [nn] does not exist."  
To create an announcement:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select Announcements  
[1-4]  
Enter announcement number  
[1–99]  
6
Choose an option:  
Create an announcement  
Cancel  
Procedures  
Assigning a Fax Extension to an Automated Attendant  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 3d- RecordingScript for  
the information you need to create announcements  
NOTE:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To create an announcement:  
Step  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to announcement  
, if Bilingual  
Modify announcement  
Delete announcement  
Confirm deletion  
Cancel deletion  
If finished.  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To listen to an announcement (Bilingual mode):  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
8
Choose one of the following:  
If the system is in Monolingual mode, listen to submenu  
prompt:  
If system is in Bilingual mode:  
Listen to submenu prompt in Primary Language  
Listen to submenu prompt in Secondary Language  
Listen to submenu definition  
If finished  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To modify an announcement:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
9
If system is in Bilingual mode, go to Step 10. If  
system is in Monolingual mode, choose one of the  
following:  
[record announcement]  
Record new announcement; then after  
recording, press  
following:  
and choose one of the  
Approve  
Listen to announcement  
Re-record announcement  
Delete new recording  
Use existing announcement. For  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To record an announcement (Bilingual mode):  
Step  
10  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
Choose one of the following:  
Record Primary Language  
Record Secondary Language  
Use existing announcement recording  
11  
Record the announcement then choose one of the  
following:  
[record announcement ]  
Approve announcement  
Listen to announcement  
Re-record announcement  
Delete new recording  
12  
Repeat announcement recording process for other  
language  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming the Schedule Options  
The Schedule Options define the Day and Night Service operation of the Automated Attendant(s). When  
you program the Schedule Options, you can:  
Administer the Weekly Business Schedule.  
Programming the Schedule Options also allows you to administer the Temporary Schedule. This  
procedure is covered in Path 3: Ongoing Maintenance and Administration, "Managing the  
MERLIN Messaging System."  
Note:  
To program the Schedule Controller:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select Schedule Options  
[1-4]  
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to Schedule Controller and schedule settings  
Administer the Schedule Controller then choose an option.  
Follow Switch Mode  
Follow Weekly Business Schedule  
Follow both the Switch Mode and the Weekly Business  
Schedule  
Administer Weekly Business Schedule  
If finished programming Schedule Controller  
Assigning a Fax Extension to an Automated Attendant  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To Administer a Weekly Business Schedule:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Choose one of the following:  
Enter day to be administered as follows:  
Sunday  
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
All days  
If finished.  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Open  
Closed  
Return to Step 6 to administer by day  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Administering Weekly Business Schedule:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone  
Input  
8
Enter opening time where:  
[hhmm]  
hh = hour [00–23]  
mm = minute [00–59]  
Enter closing time where:  
hh = hour [00–23]  
9
[hhmm]  
mm = minute [00–59]  
10 Choose one of the following:  
Approve and save. Return to Step 6 to administer another  
day.  
Re-enter. Return to Step 8.  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Line Assignments  
This procedure only applies to systems that use more than one Automated Attendant. Skip  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 4 – Line Assignments for  
the site-specific information you need to complete the following programming task.  
Note:  
If you want a line to be answered by Automated Attendant 1, no programming is  
needed.  
If you want a line to be answered by Automated Attendant 2, 3 or 4, you must enter  
the line number and identify which Automated Attendant should answer it.  
MERLIN Messaging System allows a maximum of 80 line assignments among all  
Automated Attendants.  
The procedure for deleting lines is covered in Path 3: Ongoing Maintenance and  
Administration, "Managing the MERLIN Messaging System."  
To program Line Assignments:  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select Line Assignments  
[1-4]  
Choose one of the following:  
Review Line assignment  
Add a line to Automated Attendant  
Re–enter line number  
[nnn]  
6
7
Repeat Step 5 for each line you want to add to this  
Automated Attendant  
If finished with Line Assignment programming  
Procedures  
Assigning a Fax Extension to an Automated Attendant  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Assigning a Fax Extension to an Automated Attendant  
Calling Group Extension. In order for this to occur, you must assign a Fax Machine Extension.  
Next you must use this procedure to assign a Fax extension to one or more Automated  
Attendants.  
Attendant Schedule and Fax Assignment for the site-specific information you  
Note:  
need to complete the following programming task.  
The MERLIN Messaging System allows a maximum of one fax extension per  
Automated Attendant.  
Multiple Automated Attendants can share the same fax extension.  
The procedure for removing a fax extension is covered in Path 3: Ongoing  
Maintenance and Administration, "Managing the MERLIN Messaging  
System."  
To program a Fax Extension:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select a Fax Extension  
[1-4]  
Enter an extension number  
[nnnn]  
6
7
Repeat Steps 3 – 5 for all fax extensions to be identified  
If finished with fax identification programming  
Procedures  
Programming Line Assignments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting System Security Parameters  
The MERLIN Messaging System provides the following features to help protect your system  
Transfer Restrictions – When this feature is activated, *8 transfers, Automated  
Attendant direct extension transfers are restricted to extensions that are included in the  
MERLIN Messaging System extension list. The extension list includes extensions  
assigned as Automated Attendant extensions, Mailbox extensions, Transfer– Only  
extensions and Fax extensions.The Transfer Restriction setting does not apply to Call  
Answer Service Operator extensions, Selector Code Transfer extensions and Dial  
0/Timeout extensions. Make sure the extensions for these items are valid before you  
Security Alert – Setting a minimum password length of six digits or greater is highly  
recommended to help discourage hackers. If you choose a setting of less than six digits,  
the system reminds you that a setting of six or more digits makes your system less  
Minimum Password Length – is the minimum number of digits users must enter when  
setting a new password for their mailbox. The factory setting is six digits; this setting  
can be changed to 0 – 15 digits.  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 5 – Security Settings for the  
site-specific information you need to complete the following programming tasks.  
Note:  
Setting Minimum Password Length  
Setting System Security Parameters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Transfer Restrictions  
The factory setting for Transfer Restrictions is On. When Transfer Restrictions are set to On,  
transfers (  
transfers, Automated Attendant Direct extension transfers and Personal Operator  
transfers) are restricted to extensions that are contained in the extension list (Automated  
Attendant extensions, Mailbox extensions, Transfer-Only extensions and Fax extensions) and to  
the Call Answer Service Operator extension. This helps to prevent users and callers from  
committing toll fraud by transferring to an outside operator who could place a call for them.  
Transfer Restrictions can be set to Off; however, changing the factory setting to this option is  
strongly discouraged, as it leaves your system vulnerable to toll fraud.  
Setting the Transfer Restrictions to Off leaves your system vulnerable to toll  
fraud. Lucent Technologies strongly recommends that you keep the Transfer  
Restrictions set to On.  
To set Transfer Restrictions:  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Security Parameters  
Select Transfer Restrictions  
Choose one of the following:  
On  
or  
Off  
If finished  
Procedure  
Setting Minimum Password Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Minimum Password Length  
The Minimum Password Length is the minimum number of digits that a user can specify when  
setting a password for his/her mailbox. The Minimum Password Length also applies to the  
System Administration password. The range is 0 – 15 digits.  
The shorter the Minimum Password Length, the more vulnerable the system is  
to abuse by unauthorized persons. Choosing the longest acceptable minimum  
password length maximizes the security of the system. The factory-set  
Minimum Password Length is 6 digits.  
If you attempt to set a minimum length of less than 6 digits, the system will:  
Remind you that at least 6 digits is recommended.  
Note:  
Advise you about system vulnerability.  
To set Minimum Password Length:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Security Parameters  
Select Minimum Password Length  
Choose one of the following:  
Enter Minimum Password Length  
If finished  
[0-15]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming System Group Lists (Release 2 or later)  
You can program up to ten System Group Lists that allow users to address a message to a group of mailboxes.  
Up to 50 Mailbox Extensions can be included in each System Group List. A Mailbox Extension can be in more  
than one System Group List.  
To Program System Group Lists:  
Step  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
Log in to System Administration  
1
2
3
4
Select System Group Lists.  
Create a System Group List.  
Enter System Group List Number.  
[50-59]  
Choose one of the following:  
Enter mailbox extension number.  
[nnn]  
Delete last extension entered for this list.  
Add an extension using the directory.  
[nnnnnnnnnn]  
or or  
5
or  
or  
Enter up to first ten letters of name.  
If there's more than one match for the name you  
entered, press the number corresponding to the  
correct name, as prompted.  
Delete last extension entered for this list.  
Repeat Step 5 for each mailbox you want to add to this System  
Group List.  
6
7
8
End programming for this System Group List.  
Return to Step 3 to create another System Group List.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acceptance Tests  
Performing Acceptance Testing  
After you finish programming the MERLIN Messaging System, perform the following  
acceptance tests to verify proper operation of each service as applicable. If you have any  
difficulty with any of the acceptance tests, contact your Lucent Technologies representative or  
authorized dealer.  
-
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verifying the Remote Maintenance Device (RMD)  
This procedure should be performed only by qualified technicians.  
To verify the RMD:  
Step  
1
Procedure  
Dial extension of RMD (The 12th extension on the MERLIN Messaging  
System module)  
2
3
Verify that RMD answers call and provides a high-pitch tone  
If the RMD does not answer, verify whether the RMD is working properly:  
Make sure the 2-Port, 4-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, or 10-Port PC Card  
containing the RMD is properly installed in the left-most PCMCIA slot  
on the MERLIN Messaging System module  
Make sure no terminal is connected to the serial port on the MERLIN  
Messaging System module  
Make sure you are dialing the correct RMD extension. The RMD is the  
twelfth extension on the MERLIN Messaging System module  
Procedures  
-
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Voice Mail Service  
The following tests should be performed if the system provides Voice Mail Service.  
If the MERLIN Messaging System has been set up for Bilingual operation, test the Voice  
Mail Greeting in the primary and the secondary system languages when you verify  
Note: operation in the procedures below.  
Verifying MERLIN Messaging System Ports  
To verify that the system ports are functioning correctly:  
Step  
Procedure  
1
2
Place a call to first MERLIN Messaging System port  
Verify that MERLIN Messaging System answers and plays Voice  
Mail Greeting  
3
Repeat this test for the remaining ports  
Verify Transfer to Outside Dial Tone Restricted  
Verify that outside callers cannot transfer to 9 and obtain dial tone or an outside operator.  
-
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automated Attendant Service  
If the Automated Attendant Service is used, perform the following applicable tests.  
Voice Mail Service  
-
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verifying Immediate Call Handling  
If your system is set up for Immediate Call Handling:  
Step  
1
Procedure  
Call in on a line answered by Automated Attendant Service.  
Automated Attendant Service should answer after approximately one  
ring  
2
3
If Multiple Automated Attendants are programmed, verify that the  
correct Automated Attendant answers  
Verify that the correct prompt programmed for Automated Attendant  
Day or Night Main menu (depending on time of day you run the test)  
plays  
4
Repeat this test for each line answered by Automated Attendant  
Service  
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verifying Delayed Call Handling  
If your system is set up for Delayed Call Handling:  
Step  
Procedure  
1
2
3
4
Call in on a line assigned to Automated Attendant Service. (Ask the  
primary call handler not to answer the call)  
If Multiple Automated Attendants are programmed, verify that the  
correct Automated Attendant answers  
Verify that the correct prompt for Automated Attendant Day or Night  
Main menu (depending on time of day you run the test) plays  
Repeat this test for each line assigned to Automated Attendant  
Service  
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verifying Day Main menu  
To verify correct functioning of each Day Main menu:  
Step  
Procedure  
1
2
3
4
Ensure that Day Service is active for the Automated Attendant  
Call in on a line programmed for Automated Attendant Service  
Choose a Selector Code offered on the Main menu  
Verify that correct action (transfer to appropriate extension, transfer to a  
mailbox, playing of a Submenu or playing of an announcement) will be  
performed  
5
6
Repeat this test for each Selector Code offered on Day Main menu  
Enter  
at the Main menu and verify that the correct Dial 0 / Timeout  
action is performed  
7
Repeat from Step 1 for each Automated Attendant  
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verifying Night Main menu  
If the Schedule Controller is programmed to follow only the Weekly Business Schedule:  
Step  
Procedure  
1
2
3
4
Ensure that Night Service is active for the Automated Attendant  
Call in on a line programmed for Automated Attendant Service  
Choose a Selector Code offered on the Main menu  
Verify that the correct action (transfer to appropriate extension, transfer  
to mailbox, playing of a Submenu or playing of an announcement) is  
performed  
5
6
Repeat this test for each Selector Code offered on the Night Main menu  
Enter  
at the Main menu and verify that the correct Dial 0 / Timeout  
action is performed  
7
Repeat for each Automated Attendant  
Night Service Programming.  
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verifying Night Service Programming  
Use this procedure if the Schedule Controller is set to follow the Switch mode or to follow both the Switch mode and the Weekly  
Business Schedule mode.  
(If the Schedule Controller is set to follow the Weekly Business Schedule mode, skip this procedure.)  
To verify the Night Main menu:  
Step  
Procedure  
1
Perform the appropriate step for the Night Service option programmed on MERLIN MAGIX:  
Night Service with Time Set: Program current time on communications system to two minutes before  
time set for night mode to go into effect, then wait three minutes for system to go into Night Service  
mode  
Night Service button: Press button on attendant’s console.  
Night Service button on more than one attendant: Press Night Service button at each console  
Night Service button password: Press Night Service button on one console and enter the password  
2
3
4
Place a call on an incoming line answered by an Automated Attendant  
Choose a Selector Code from the Night Main menu  
Verify that the correct action (transfer to the appropriate extension, transfer to mailbox, playing of a submenu  
or playing of an announcement) will be performed  
5
6
Repeat this test for each Selector Code on the Night Main menu  
Enter  
at the Main menu and verify that the correct Dial 0 / Timeout action is performed  
7
8
Repeat for each Automated Attendant  
Reset system time to current time, if necessary  
Verifying Immediate Call Handling  
Verifying Night Main menu  
-
-
-
Verifying Delayed Call Handling  
Verifying Day Main menu  
-
Verifying Extension Coverage  
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verifying Fax Machines  
If a MERLIN Messaging System Automated Attendendant has a Fax extension  
programmed to receive faxes:  
Step  
Procedure  
1
Send a fax to one of the incoming lines assigned to Automated Attendant  
Service  
2
3
Verify that the fax is received by the proper fax machine  
If a fax Message-Waiting indicator has been programmed for that fax  
machine, check that it is lit  
4
If Multiple Automated Attendant operation is programmed, repeat this test  
for each Automated Attendant that has a Fax extension  
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Call Answer Service  
If the Call Answer Service is used, perform the following applicable tests.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Verifying Fax Machines  
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verifying Extension Coverage  
To verify that coverage for each extension works correctly:  
Step  
Procedure  
1
Call an extension that is a sender in a Coverage Group covered by a  
MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group  
2
3
Do not answer the call  
Verify that the MERLIN Messaging System answers and plays the  
mailbox’s greeting  
5
Bilingual operation only:  
Verify that the greeting is played in the Primary Language  
Press *1 and verify that you hear the system prompts in the  
secondary language  
6
Repeat this test for all extensions that have Group Coverage provided by  
the MERLIN Messaging System  
-
-
-
-
-
Verifying Line Coverage  
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verifying Line Coverage  
To verify that coverage for external calls works correctly:  
Step  
Procedure  
1
Place an outside call to a line that should receive MERLIN Messaging  
System Call Answer Service  
2
3
Do not answer the call  
For lines without a principal user, the call should receive the coverage of  
extension with lowest logical ID in Coverage Group  
4
5
For lines with a principal user, the call should receive coverage of  
principal user  
Bilingual operation only:  
Verify that system prompts are played in the Primary Language  
Press *1 and verify that you hear system prompts in the Secondary  
Language  
6
Repeat this test for all lines that should receive MERLIN Messaging  
System Call Answer Service  
-
-
-
-
-
Verifying Extension Coverage  
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting Overview  
This section provides procedures for solving the most common problems that you may  
encounter with the system. You may be able to resolve a problem quickly and easily by  
following the appropriate steps. If you are unable to resolve a problem, call the Lucent  
Technologies Technical Support Organization (TSO) Helpline at 1 800 628-2888 or your  
authorized dealer.  
Problems and Corrective Actions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problems and Corrective Actions  
Problems  
Touch Tones were entered but not detected by the MERLIN Messaging System.  
A call transferred by the system appears on both the ICOM button (Key mode) or SA button (Hybrid/PBX mode) and a telephone's line button.  
System terminates recording of name, greeting or message before user finishes.  
Caller hears ringing, but the system does not answer.  
Caller hears elongated ringing but the system does not answer.  
The system does not answer immediately.  
A busy signal is received when calling into voice mail.  
Messages cannot be left in a user's voice mailbox.  
The first part of the greeting gets cut off.  
Calls are not being transferred.  
Calls are not being transferred properly.  
Message-Waiting lights are not turning on and off.  
A user is unable to log in to Voice Mail.  
Message-Waiting lights are not being turned on/off in a timely manner.  
Calls are not being answered by the correct Automated Attendant.  
Outcalling is delayed.  
Outcalling to a pager is not working.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Touch Tones were entered but not detected by the MERLIN Messaging System.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
The line is too noisy. The system may not be able to  
interpret Touch Tones while a prompt plays because of the  
noise.  
Wait until the prompt finishes before  
entering the Touch Tones.  
If you are using a speakerphone, turn  
off the microphone.  
Correct the noisy lines.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A call transferred by the system appears on both the ICOM button (Key mode) or SA button (Hybrid/PBX  
mode) and a telephone's line button.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
When the system transfers a call to a telephone Use the ICOM or SA button to answer the call.  
that has a line appearance for the line the call is  
on, the call will ring at the ICOM button but  
will also flash on the line button. This is normal  
operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System terminates recording of name, greeting or message before user finishes.  
Possible Cause Corrective Action  
Recording may have reached the time limit set Be sure the recording does not exceed the time limit,  
for it.  
then re-record it.  
Speaker's voice sounded like a Touch-Tone  
digit.  
Re-record the message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caller hears ringing, but the system does not answer.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
This is normal when all the system ports are  
busy.  
None. Add ports if this happens frequently.  
One or more MERLIN Messaging System ports  
may be locked or defective.  
To verify whether the voice ports on the MERLIN  
Messaging System module are operating properly:  
Look at the voice-port LEDs on the MERLIN  
Messaging System module.  
If any voice-port LEDs are Off, call the Lucent  
Technologies Technical Service Organization  
(TSO) or your authorized dealer.  
If any voice-port LEDs are green, call the  
extension number associated with the voice port.  
If you get no answer, call the Lucent  
Technologies TSO or your authorized dealer.  
If any voice-port LEDs are green blinking, a call  
is being handled at the voice port. If the call does  
not drop, call the Lucent Technologies TSO or  
your authorized dealer.  
Check the settings through MERLIN MAGIX  
Integrated System programming. The SA or ICOM  
buttons should be set to Immediate Ring.  
The ICOM buttons (Key mode) or SA buttons  
(Hybrid/PBX mode) associated with the  
MERLIN Messaging System ports (extensions)  
connected to the MERLIN MAGIX Integrated  
System may have been set to No Ring.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caller hears elongated ringing and the system does not answer.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
MERLIN Messaging System ports have been  
busied out by the communications system.  
Restore the slot containing the MERLIN Messaging  
System via SPM or the communications system  
administration terminal set. If this has no effect, call the  
Lucent Technologies Technical Service Organization  
(TSO) or your authorized dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system does not answer immediately.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
The ICOM buttons (Key mode) or SA buttons Use MERLIN MAGIX Integrated System programming  
(Hybrid/PBX mode) on the MERLIN ports to check the settings. They should be programmed for  
(extensions) connected to the MERLIN MAGIX Immediate Ring.  
Integrated System may have been set to No  
Ring or Delayed Ring.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A busy signal is received when calling into voice mail.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
Try again later. If the condition persists, call the Lucent  
All ports are in use or maintenance is being  
performed on the MERLIN Messaging System Technologies Technical Service Organization (TSO) or  
module.  
authorized dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages cannot be left in a user's voice mailbox.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
Voice mailbox is full or system is full.  
Delete unneeded messages from the mailbox.  
Mailbox sizes range from 5 to 180 minutes or 120 messages. The system capacity is 100  
hours of storage. If users frequently hear the "Mailbox 80% Full" or "Mailbox Full"  
Note: message, the System Manager may want to increase the storage size of the users' voice  
mailboxes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The first part of the greeting gets cut off.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
You may have begun recording the greeting too Re-record the greeting, speaking after the beep ends.  
early.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calls are not being transferred.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
Rotary Enable has not been administered for the Make sure all MERLIN Messaging System extensions  
MERLIN Messaging System extensions.  
"Enabling Rotary Signaling" in Path 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calls are not being transferred properly.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
Automated Attendant Service may not be  
administered properly.  
Make sure the menu prompt matches the  
programmed Selector Codes.  
If the problem involves the Call Answer Service  
Operator, be sure the proper extension has been  
designated as the Call Answer Service Operator.  
On the MERLIN Messaging System, check the  
setting for the Call Answer Service Operator's  
Extension. On the MERLIN MAGIX Integrated  
System, check the setting for Unassigned under  
the Options menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message-Waiting lights are not turning on and off.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
The MERLIN Messaging port that lights the  
Message-Waiting light has not been  
administered as Rotary Enabled.  
For Release 2 or later, check the communications  
system programming for Port 2 on a 2-port system, Port  
4 on a 4-port system, Ports 5 and 6 on a 6-port system,  
Ports 7 and 8 on an 8-port system system, Ports 9 and  
10 on a 10-port system, or Ports 11 and 12 on a 12-port  
system to ensure the port is set to Rotary Enable.  
For Release 1 or 1.1, check Port 2 on a 2-port system,  
Port 4 on a 4-port system, or port 6 on a 6-port system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A user is unable to log in to Voice Mail.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
Password may be incorrect.  
Check to see that the password is correct. If the user has  
forgotten the password, log in to the MERLIN  
Messaging System as the System Administrator and  
reinitialize the mailbox password.  
Someone else is already logged in to that  
mailbox.  
Only one person can log in to a mailbox at a time.  
Change the mailbox password to prevent unauthorized  
use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message-Waiting lights are not being turned On/Off in a timely manner.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
If the problem occurs during times of heavy  
telephone traffic, there may be an insufficient  
number of Touch-Tone Receivers (TTRs).  
Have the Lucent Technologies TSO or your authorized  
dealer test TTRs and review your system configuration  
to make sure you have sufficient TTRs.  
MERLIN Messaging System port that turns the To test if the MERLIN Messaging port is faulty, dial  
Message-Waiting light On and Off is defective. the extension of the MERLIN Messaging port that  
lights the Message– Waiting light. For release 2 or  
later, on a 2-port system, dial extension for Port 2; on a  
4-port system, dial extension for Port 4; on a 6-port  
system, dial extension for Port 6; on an 8-port system,  
dial extension for ports 7 and 8; on a 10-port system,  
dial the extension for Ports 9 and 10; on a 12-port  
system, dial extension for Ports 11 and 12. For Release  
1 and 1.1, on a 2-port system, dial extension for Port 2;  
on a 4-port system, dial extension for Port 4; on a  
6-port, dial extension for Port 6.  
The MERLIN Messaging port LED should be green. If  
it is not and if the port does not answer and play the  
voice mail greeting, the base module needs to be  
replaced.This can only be done by a trained technician.  
Call your Lucent Technologies TSO or authorized  
dealer.  
If only one Message-Waiting light is affected, From an Operator Console, check the Message-Waiting  
the LED on the telephone set may be defective. light:  
Go off-hook on the extension.  
1. Enter # 53 followed by the extension number to  
turn the light On.  
2. Enter # * 53 followed by the extension number to  
turn the light Off.  
If the light is defective, replace the telephone.  
There is heavy call traffic and Outcalling  
volume on the MERLIN Messaging System.  
You may need to add more ports or reduce the  
frequency of Outcalling. You should also check the  
The same port used for Message-Waiting light programming of the MERLIN LEGEND  
activation/deactivation performs Outcalling.  
Communications System to make sure that the Calling  
This port is also used in Call Handling. If your Group is administered as a Linear Hunt type and that  
system performs heavy Outcalling or has heavy the ports that perform Message-Waiting light  
call volume, the port may frequently be  
unavailable for Message-Waiting light  
activation/deactivation.  
activation/ deactivation are the last port(s) in the  
MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group.  
For Release 2 or later, the ports that perform  
Message-Waiting Light activation/deactivation are Port  
2 on a 2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port system, Ports 5  
and 6 on a 6-port system, Ports 7 and 8 on an 8-port  
system, Ports 9 and 10 on a 10-port system, and Ports  
11 and 12 on a 12-port system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For Release 1 or 1.1, the port that performs  
Message-Waiting Light activation/deactivation is Port 2  
on a 2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port system, Ports 5  
and 6 on a 6-port system  
Message-Waiting light remains lit if there are  
any new messages in the mailbox.  
Once you listen to all new messages, the  
Message-Waiting light goes off.  
Message-Waiting light may be indicating that If you are the General Mailbox Owner, check the  
there is a message in the General Mailbox or  
that an operator message or a fax has arrived.  
General Mailbox and delete all messages. If you are the  
Fax Message Receiver, check to see whether a fax has  
arrived and, if so, turn off your Message-Waiting light.  
Also, check with the operator to see whether you have a  
message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calls are not being answered by the correct Automated Attendant.  
Possible Cause Corrective Action  
Line may be assigned to the wrong Automated Check MERLIN Messaging System line assignments.  
Attendant.  
Make necessary corrections.  
If configured with a "phantom" station, the  
Make sure that the correct phantom station is the  
phantom station used for Delayed Call Handling principal owner of the line. Correct programming, if  
may not be the principal owner of the line. See necessary.  
your communications system Feature Reference  
for more information regarding phantom  
stations.  
Automated Attendant Mailbox has not been set Make sure that the Automated Attendant Mailbox  
up for the Delayed Call Handling Calling  
Group.  
number corresponds to the Delayed Call Handling  
Calling Group extension number.  
Lines may not be assigned to the Calling Group Check communications system programming to be sure  
used for Delayed Call Handling.  
lines are assigned to the correct Calling Group and  
correct, if necessary.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Outcalling is delayed.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
There is heavy call traffic and Outcalling  
volume on the MERLIN Messaging System.  
You may need to add more ports or reduce the  
frequency of Outcalling. You should also check the  
The same port used for Message-Waiting light programming of the MERLIN LEGEND  
activation/deactivation performs Outcalling.  
Communications System to make sure that the Calling  
This port is also used in Call Handling. If your Group is administered as a Linear Hunt type and that  
system performs heavy Outcalling or has heavy the port(s) that do Outcalling are the last port(s) in the  
call volume, the port may frequently be  
unavailable for Outcalling.  
calling group.  
For Release 2 or later, the port(s) that do Outcalling are  
Port 2 on a 2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port system,  
Ports 5 and 6 on a 6-port system, Ports 7 and 8 on an  
8-port system, Ports 9 and 10 on a 10-port system, or  
Ports 11 and 12 on a 12-port system.  
For Release 1 or 1.1, the port that does the Outcalling is  
Port 2 on a 2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port system, or  
Port 6 on a 6-port system.  
If the problem occurs during times of heavy  
telephone traffic, there may be insufficient  
Touch-Tone Receivers (TTRs).  
Have Lucent Technologies TSO or your authorized  
dealer test the TTRs and review your system  
configuration to make sure you have sufficient TTRs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Outcalling to a pager is not working.  
Possible Cause  
Corrective Action  
Outcalling number is not properly programmed. Check that the Outcalling number is correct. If not,  
reprogram the number.  
Restriction is still assigned to the last port.  
Check the communications system programming to  
ensure the last port is Unrestricted. Also check the  
Facility Restriction Level (FRL).  
Insufficient number of pauses in Outcalling  
number.  
It is a good idea to include a pause between the pool  
access number and the telephone number. It is also  
important to include a sufficient number of pauses  
between the pager number and the Personal  
Identification Number (PIN) or between the pager  
number and the call back number. Leave at least seven  
pauses after the pager number. You must allow enough  
time for the paging service to answer before the PIN  
and/or callback number is dialed.  
If the problem occurs during times of heavy  
telephone traffic, there may be insufficient  
Touch-Tone Receivers (TTRs).  
Have Lucent Technologies Technical Service  
Organization (TSO) or your authorized dealer test the  
TTRs and review your system configuration to make  
sure you have sufficient TTRs.  
There may not be a line available to place a call. If all lines are in use when the system attempts to  
Outcall, the Outcall does not go through. The MERLIN  
Messaging System waits the amount of time  
programmed as the Outcalling Delay before trying to  
call again. You may need to increase the number of  
Outcalling Cycles, increase the minutes between  
outcalls and/or obtain more lines.  
Message was received outside the hours  
This is normal operation. Outcalling is performed only  
programmed in the user's Outcalling Schedule during the hours specified by the user's Outcalling  
or the Outcalling period is over.  
Outcalling may not be turned On.  
Schedule. Outcalling will be done only for messages  
received during the Outcalling period.  
Have the mailbox owner check to see that Outcalling is  
turned On.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Backing Up the System to the PC Card  
Following MERLIN Messaging System programming, you can back up programmed  
prompts onto the PC Card. The backed up information may be used to perform a system restore if  
the system fails or if data becomes corrupted.  
If you need your entire system backed up and restored, use the PC-based system administration  
software. See the MERLIN Messaging Release 2 System Administration Guide for more  
information.  
The MERLIN Messaging System must be in an idle state in order for the backup to  
begin.  
Note:  
Prior to starting the backup process, the system will busy-out the messaging ports.  
During the backup process, the system does not answer calls.  
Backing up the PC Card can take up to 20 minutes.  
To back up the system:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Backup  
Select Backup, then choose one of the  
following:  
or  
Confirm  
Cancel  
4
If finished  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Installation Configuration and Programming  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Installation  
Programming Overview  
Preparing the Communications System  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System  
Programming Optional Extension Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
This section of the Online Guide describes the communications system programming tasks that  
must be performed after the MERLIN Messaging System module has been installed and  
the tasks described in Preparing the Communications System and Programming the MERLIN  
Messaging System.  
You can program the communications system settings from a communications system  
programming console or you can use System Programming Maintenance (SPM) software on a  
personal computer.  
Programming Optional Extension Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Group-Assigned Features  
VMS Transfer Return Interval  
Setting the VMS Transfer Return Interval  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Transfer Return Time  
The Transfer Return Time is the number of times a transferred call will ring at the transfer  
destination before it returns to the extension from which it was transferred.  
If  
Then  
All extensions are covered by the MERLIN  
Messaging System only  
You must set the Transfer Return Time to a  
value > the Coverage Delay Interval  
Any extension has both Personal Coverage and  
Group Coverage by the MERLIN Messaging  
System  
You must set the Transfer Return Time to a  
value > the sum of the Coverage Delay and  
Delay Ring Intervals  
The factory setting is four rings.  
Refer to your communications System Planning Form  
containing System Features information to locate the Transfer  
Return Time identified for your site  
Note:  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To set the Transfer Return Time:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Options  
2
3
4
5
Select Options  
Select Transfer  
Transfer  
Select Transfer Return Time  
Erase current number of rings  
Return Time  
Drop or  
+
or  
Backspace  
6
7
Enter number of rings before calls [nnn]  
are transferred back the originator  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Procedures  
Setting the VMS Transfer Return Interval  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the VMS Transfer Return Interval  
The VMS Transfer Return Interval is the number of times a call transferred by the MERLIN  
Transfer Redirect Extension.  
If  
Then  
All stations are covered by the MERLIN  
Messaging System  
You must set the VMS Transfer Return  
Interval to a value > the Group Coverage Ring  
Delay  
Any station has both Personal Coverage  
You must set the VMS Transfer Return  
(Primary only or Primary and Secondary) and Interval to a value > the sum of the Group  
group coverage by the MERLIN Messaging  
System  
Coverage Ring Delay and Primary Cover Ring  
Delay  
The factory setting is four rings.  
The VMS Transfer Return Interval is not indicated on any  
Note:  
communications System Planning Form.  
Recommendation: Make the VMS Transfer Return Interval =  
the Transfer Return Time  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To set the VMS Transfer Return Interval:  
Step Programming Task Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
AuxEquip  
VMS/AA  
2
3
Select Auxiliary Equipment  
Select Voice Messaging  
System/Automated Attendant  
TransferRtn  
Backspace  
4
5
Select Transfer Return  
Erase current number of rings  
Drop or  
6
7
Enter number of rings before  
calls are returned from transfer  
[n]  
[n]  
Enter  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Redirecting Calls Sent to Unassigned Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Redirecting Calls Sent to Unassigned Extensions  
You must designate a Transfer Redirect extension to which the following calls can be  
transferred:  
Calls transferred by the MERLIN Messaging System to extensions where there is no  
answer and no coverage.  
Calls coming in from outside the system to unassigned numbers.  
Refer to the communications System Planning Form containing System Features  
information to locate site-specific settings.  
The factory setting is the first system operator position assigned in the communications  
system.  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To Redirect Calls to Unassigned Extensions:  
Step  
1
Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
Enter Programming  
mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Select Options  
Options  
Display next page of  
menu  
/
4
5
Select Unassigned  
Extension  
Unassigned  
Select 1 Transfer  
Extension type  
QCC Queue  
Extension  
Grp Calling  
then  
+
then  
Enter  
6
7
If Extension or Group  
Calling was selected,  
erase current setting if  
needed  
or  
Backspace  
Enter telephone  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
extension or Calling  
Group to which calls  
should be redirected  
Enter  
8
Return to System  
Exit/Back  
Programming menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Call Answer Service  
Programming the Call Answer Service features enables your communications system to  
Select the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group as the Group Coverage receiver.  
Any number of extensions can be assigned to a Coverage Group. Unanswered calls to  
extensions in the Coverage Group are redirected to MERLIN Messaging System ports in the  
MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group.  
Redirecting Calls Sent to Unassigned Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Group Coverage  
Use the following procedure to:  
Identify the specific extensions designated to receive coverage by the MERLIN  
Messaging System Call Answer Service.  
Identify the extension of the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group.  
The above extensions were identified during system planning. To locate the actual  
extension data that you must enter, refer to the communications System Planning Form  
Note: that contains "Group Coverage" information.  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To program Group Coverage:  
Step  
1
Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Extensions  
2
3
4
5
Select Extensions  
Display next page of menu  
Select Group Coverage  
Enter group number (1-30)  
/
Group Cover  
F3  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
Enter extensions  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
7
8
Repeat Step 6 for all extensions  
Return to Extensions menu  
Exit/Back  
9
Select Group Calling  
Grp Calling  
GrpCoverage  
10  
11  
Select Group Coverage  
Enter extensions of MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling  
Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
12  
13  
Enter Coverage Group number [nnn]  
Enter  
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Procedures  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Redirecting Calls Sent to Unassigned Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating the Group Coverage Ring Delay  
The Group Coverage Ring Delay is the number of times a call will ring at an extension without  
Personal Coverage but covered by a Calling Group, before the call is sent to an assigned  
Calling Group (Group Coverage Receiver). If any Personal Coverage (Primary or Secondary)  
is available, the Delay Ring Interval is added to this Ring Delay for a total Ring Delay value.  
This procedure is used to specify the number of rings before a call is sent to Group Coverage.  
The factory setting is 3 rings.  
The setting must be identified for each sender extension assigned to the Coverage  
Group.  
Refer to the communications System Planning Form containing "Group Coverage Ring  
Delay" information for site-specific settings.  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To create the Group Coverage Ring Delay:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Extensions  
2
3
Select Extensions  
Display third page of menu  
/
/
Cover Delay  
Group Cover  
4
5
6
Select Cover Delay  
Select Group Cover  
Enter sender’s extension  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
Enter  
7
8
Erase current number of rings  
or  
+
Backspace  
Enter the number of rings for  
Coverage Delay Interval (1-9)  
[n]  
[n]  
Enter  
9
Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each  
sender extension assigned to Group  
Coverage  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
10 Return to System Programming menu  
Redirecting Calls Sent to Unassigned Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Call Handling Methods  
The MERLIN Messaging Automated Attendant Service provides four call handling methods  
that allow external, incoming calls to be answered by either the Automated Attendant or  
Fax Call Handling  
Site-specific communications system Call Handling information is included on  
communications System Planning Forms addressing the following topics:  
System Numbering: Extension Jacks  
Group Coverage  
Group Calling  
The following sections describe each Call Handling method and the related programming steps  
required.  
Procedures  
Fax Call Handling  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Immediate Call Handling  
With Immediate Call Handling, the MERLIN Messaging Automated Attendant Service answers  
all incoming calls.  
If  
Then  
The system operator has a Direct-Line Console Calls ring on the DLC’s line or pool button if  
the MERLIN Messaging System does not  
answer the call within the Delay Ring  
Interval  
(DLC)  
The system operator has a Queued Call Console Calls overflow from the MERLIN Messaging  
System to the QCC when the Calling Group  
overflow threshold criteria are met  
(QCC)  
The number of incoming calls to the MERLIN  
Messaging System is large  
Overflow calls are sent to the system  
operator  
No MERLIN Messaging ports are available to  
answer the call  
The call is transferred to the QCC overflow  
queue when the Queue Overflow Threshold  
is reached or to a DLC after the Delay Ring  
Interval  
When Fax Call Handling is programmed, Automated Attendant Service recognizes the fax  
calling (CNG) tone and directs the fax call to the fax machine or fax group programmed  
for the particular Automated Attendant.  
Note:  
Programming Required:  
Assign the lines that you want answered by Automated Attendant to the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group.  
Assigning Lines/Pools to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group.  
If you want a DLC or other telephone that is not a QCC to provide backup Call Handling  
for the Automated Attendant:  
Assign the lines answered by the Automated Attendant as Personal Line buttons on  
the DLC or other telephone.  
Assigning Personal Lines  
Set the Personal Line buttons to Delay Ring.  
Setting Line/Cover Buttons to Delay Ring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Set the lines answered by the Automated Attendant to "No Ring" on the MERLIN  
Messaging System telephone  
Setting No Ring for Other Extensions  
If you want a QCC to provide backup for the Automated Attendant, program the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group to overflow to the QCC queue. Set the calling overflow  
thresholds as desired.  
Handling  
If the communications system uses the Night Service feature, assign the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group as a Night Service Receiver for each appropriate Night  
Service group.  
Programming a Night Service Coverage Receiver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning Trunks/Pools to the MERLIN Messaging System  
Calling Group  
You must assign the trunks/pools to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group to assure  
that incoming calls are directed to the MERLIN Messaging System.  
Refer to the communications System Planning Form containing Group Calling information to  
identify the lines that are affected.  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To assign trunks/pools to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group:  
Step Programming Task  
Programming Console  
PC  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Extensions  
2
3
4
5
6
Select Extensions  
Display next page of menu  
Select Group Calling  
/
Grp Calling  
Line/Pool  
Select Line/Pool Assignment  
Enter the extension number of the  
MERLIN Messaging System Calling  
Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Enter  
7
Enter trunk/pool numbers  
8
9
Repeat Step 7 for all trunks and pools  
to be added to the Calling Group  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Return to System Programming menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning Personal Lines  
With Immediate Call Handling, if you want a DLC or other telephone that is not a QCC to provide backup  
call handling for the Automated Attendant, you must assign the lines answered by the Automated Attendant  
as Personal Line buttons. You must also set the Personal Line buttons to Delay Ring to ensure proper  
operation.  
To add an outside line to the extension used for Outcalling in Key mode:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
[any key]  
2
3
4
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Select Lines/Trunks  
Lines/Trunks  
Enter the extension number you want [nnn]  
to program  
[nnn]  
Enter  
5
Add the Outcalling line assignments Press line button on console  
by selecting each line button and  
turning on the green  
or  
function key  
+
Message-Waiting light  
Exit/Back  
6
7
8
Press Exit/Back when you have  
finished adding the Outcalling lines  
to that extension  
Repeat Steps 4-6 for each extension  
providing backup call handling for  
the Automated Attendant  
Return to System Programming menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Line/Cover Buttons to Delay Ring  
Delay Ring is a communications system ringing option that provides a delay before the  
telephone rings, when a call is received on a cover button or outside line button. The delay is  
two rings for an outside line, SA and ICOM buttons.  
You should use this procedure if you want calls not answered by the MERLIN Messaging  
System to ring on the operator’s DLC after two rings.  
Refer to the "Group Calling" communications System Planning Form for line and pool  
numbers. Use communications System Planning Form containing "System Numbering:  
Extension information", to identify the system operator’s extension.  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To set Line/Cover Buttons to Delay Ring:  
Step Programming Task  
Programming Console  
PC  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Display next page of menu  
/
Select Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Cntr-Prg  
4
5
Select Program Extension  
Program Ext  
Enter extension you want to program  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
Start Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Start  
7
8
Select line/feature button  
Press button on console  
or  
function key, then  
+
Choose an option:  
Set all lines at the extension to Delay  
Ring  
Set individual lines at the extension  
to Delay Ring. Repeat steps 7 and 8  
in each individual line you want to  
program  
9
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
/
Return to System Programming menu  
Assigning Trunks/Pools to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting No Ring for Other Extensions  
If a line is assigned to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group and it also appears at  
other telephones, the line should be set to "No Ring" on the non-MERLIN Messaging System  
telephones.  
To do this, you must:  
Refer to the communications System Planning Form containing Group Calling  
information to identify the lines that are affected.  
Use your communications system Centralized Telephone Programming to set the lines  
answered by the Automated Attendant to No Ring.  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To Set No Ring for Other Extensions:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Display next page of menu  
/
Select Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Cntr-Prg  
Program Ext  
4
5
Select Program Extension  
Enter extension you want to  
program  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
7
Select line/feature button  
Press button on console  
or  
+
function key, then  
Choose an option:  
Set all lines at the extension  
to No Ring  
Set individual lines at the  
extension to No Ring  
8
9
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 as needed  
Start  
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
/
Procedures  
Assigning Trunks/Pools to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Providing Overflow Coverage (Hybrid/PBX Only) to the QCC  
Queue for Immediate Call Handling  
You must use this procedure if the communications system operator has a Queued Call  
Console (QCC) and the QCC should receive overflow calls from the MERLIN Messaging  
System. The QCC will receive calls when the number of calls waiting in the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group queue is equal to or greater than the programmed Overflow  
Threshold. Refer to the communications System Planning Form containing Group Calling  
information to locate site-specific Overflow Threshold settings.  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program Overflow Coverage (Hybrid/PBX Only) to the QCC Queue for Immediate Call  
Handling:  
Step Programming Task  
Programming Console  
PC  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Extensions  
2
3
4
5
Select Extensions  
Display next page of menu  
Select Group Calling  
/
Grp Calling  
Overflow  
Select Group Calling Overflow  
Coverage  
6
7
Enter extension of MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Enter  
Enter the Listed Directory Number [nnn]  
(LDN) for the QCC Queue  
Number Based  
Overflow  
8
9
Select Number Based Overflow  
Erase current number of calls  
or  
Backspace  
10 Enter the number of calls (1-99) in [nnn]  
[nnn]  
queue before calls are sent to QCC  
Enter  
Time Based Overflow  
11 Select Time Based Overflow  
12 Erase current number of seconds  
or  
Backspace  
13 Enter the number of seconds in  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
queue before calls are sent to QCC  
Enter  
Prompt Based  
Overflow  
14 Select Prompt Based Overflow  
Yes or No  
Enter  
15 Select Yes or No  
or  
In most cases you select No.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
16 Return to System Programming  
menu  
Assigning Trunks/Pools to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To program a Night Service Coverage Receiver:  
Step Programming Task Console Input/Selection  
PC nput/Selection  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
4
5
Select Night Service  
Select Group Assignment  
Select Calling Group  
NightSrvce  
GroupAssign  
Calling Grp  
Enter the Night Service operator  
extension  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Enter  
6
7
Enter the extension of the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
Return to System Programming menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Delayed Call Handling  
With Delayed Call Handling, incoming calls ring at the system operator’s telephone. The  
system operator, the MERLIN Messaging System answers the call after the Delay Ring  
interval. The caller receives Automated Attendant Service.  
Programming Required:  
Assign lines for immediate ring on the Direct-Line Console [DLC or other telephone  
Assigning Lines/Pools to the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group.  
Select an unused Calling Group extension with no members (called a Phantom Calling  
group) and assign the lines that you want answered on a delayed basis by the Automated  
Assign Lines/Pools to the Delayed Call Handling Calling Group  
Assign the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group as the Overflow Coverage  
receiver for the Delayed Call Handling Calling Group and program the following  
Overflow Coverage settings:  
Set the Time-Based Overflow to the number of seconds that corresponds to the  
number of rings that you want the system operator to hear before the call is sent to  
the Automated Attendant.  
Set the Number-Based Overflow for the Delayed Call Handling Calling Group to  
99.  
Handling Coverage Group  
On the MERLIN Messaging System, assign the new Delayed Call Handling  
Calling Group extension as an Automated Attendant extension eith no telephone.  
Assigning Automated Attendant Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Assigning Outside Lines or Pools to Delayed Call Handling Calling Group  
When setting up the MERLIN Messaging System for Delayed Call Handling, first select an unused  
Calling Group extension with no members (phantom Calling Group). Next, use this procedure to program  
the outside lines or pools assigned to the buttons on the DLC Operator position to ring directly into the  
phantom Calling Group.  
To assign outside lines or pools to Delayed Call Handling Calling Group:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Extensions  
2
3
4
Select Extensions  
Display next page of menu  
Select Group Calling  
/
Grp Calling  
Line/Pool  
5
6
Select Line/Pool  
Enter extension number of Delayed [nnn]  
Call Handling Calling Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Enter  
7
Enter line/trunk or pool number.  
Repeat this step for each line/trunk  
or pool that you want to ring  
directly into Delayed Call Handling  
Group.  
[nnn]  
Exit/Back  
8
9
Return to Extensions menu  
Select Group Calling  
Grp Calling  
GrpCoverage  
10 Select Group Coverage  
11 Enter Extension number of  
MERLIN Messaging System  
Calling Group  
[nn]  
[nn]  
[nn]  
Enter  
12 Enter Coverage Group number  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
13 Return to System Programming  
menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Providing Overflow Coverage to MERLIN Messaging System for the Delayed Call Handling  
Calling Group  
Use this procedure to do the following:  
Specify the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group as the overflow receiver for the Delayed Call  
Handling Calling Group.  
Change the factory setting for the Number-Based Overflow from 1 to 99 calls.  
Set the Time-Based Overflow threshold to the appropriate setting (approximately 5 seconds for each  
ring). For example, if you want a call to ring at the DLC System Operator's position 5 times before  
being transferred, set the Time-Based Overflow to 25 seconds.  
Keep the factory settings for the Calling Group type  
(AutoLogout) and hunt type (circular).  
Note:  
[nnn]  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any  
key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Extensions  
2
Select Extensions  
3
4
Display next page of menu  
Select Group Calling  
Grp Calling  
Overflow  
5
6
Select Overflow  
Enter extension number of Delayed [nnn]  
Call Handling Calling Group  
[nnn]  
+
Enter  
Drop  
7
Erase current overflow receiver  
extension, if assigned  
8
9
Enter extension for the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Number Based  
Select Number-Based Overflow  
Overflow  
10 Erase the current number of calls  
Drop  
+
11 Enter the highest setting (to ensure [99]  
calls go to overflow based on time  
and not number of calls)  
[99]  
Enter  
Time Based  
12 Select Time-Based Overflow  
Overflow  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13 Erase the current time setting  
Drop  
+
14 Enter the number of seconds  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
(0-900)  
Exit  
Exit  
Exit  
15 Return to System Programming  
menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Night Only Call Handling  
If Night Only Call Handling is programmed, the communications system directs calls to the  
MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group extensions. It is usually activated after normal  
business hours. You must identify the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group as the Night  
Service group member for the system operator.  
Refer to the communications System Planning Form containing Night Service: Group  
Assignment information to locate the Night Service operator extension and the extension  
number for the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group.  
Programming Required:  
Assign the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group as the Night Service receiver for  
all applicable Night Service groups.  
Programming a Night Service Coverage Receiver  
The lines assigned to the Night Service group that will receive Night Only Call  
Handling treatment should not be assigned to the MERLIN Messaging System  
Note: Calling Group.  
Create a Night Service Exclusion List for those communications systems that are  
exempt from Night Only Call Handling.  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
The Exclusion List contains extensions that are exempt from Night Service password  
requirements.  
If  
Then  
You want to allow Outcalling after hours  
Messaging System port used for Outcalling on  
the Exclusion List  
Refer to your communications System Planning Form containing Night Service,  
Outward Restriction information to identify the MERLIN Messaging port used for  
Note: Outcalling.  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To create the Exclusion List:  
Step To  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
NightSrvce  
ExcludeList  
2
3
4
Select Night Service  
Select Exclusion List  
Assign the MERLIN Messaging  
System port used for Outcalling to  
the Exclusion List  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
5
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Programming Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Restrictions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Calling Restriction to Allow Outcalling  
If  
Then  
The Outcalling feature is not used  
The communications system extensions assigned to MERLIN  
Messaging System module voice ports should be Outward  
Restricted.  
The Outcalling feature is used  
For Release 2 or later, ports to be unrestricted or toll restricted are:  
Port 2 only on a 2-port system  
Port 4 only on a 4-port system  
Ports 5 and 6 only on a 6-port system  
Ports 7 and 8 only on a 8-port system  
Ports 9 and 10 only on a 10-port system  
Ports 11 and 12 only on a 12-port system  
For Release 1 and 1.1, ports to be unrestricted or toll restricted are:  
Port 2 only on a 2-port system  
Port 4 only on a 4-port system  
Port 6 only on a 6-port system  
The factory setting for all the MERLIN Messaging System extensions assigned to  
the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group VMI are Outward Restricted.  
Note:  
Refer to your communications System Planning Form containing Call Restrictions  
and Lists information to identify the Outward Restriction status of extensions at  
your site  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing Calling Restrictions to Allow Outcalling:  
Step To… Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Extensions  
Restriction  
2
3
4
Select Extensions  
Select Restriction  
Enter the extension number of the [nnn]  
highest MERLIN Messaging  
System port  
[nnn]  
Enter  
5
Select Unrestricted or Toll Restrict  
Unrestricted  
as applicable  
or  
Toll Restrict  
Enter  
6
7
Choose Enter  
Exit/Back  
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Procedures  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Restriction  
(For Hybrid/PBX mode only)  
As an additional security step, network dialing for all extensions, including messaging port extensions, should be  
processed through ARS using dial access code 9.  
All ports on the communications system that are programmed as VMI ports must be:  
Assigned an FRL of 0  
Outward Restricted  
Assigned Disallowed List 7  
This combination of restrictions is designed to prohibit all Outcalling.  
To prevent toll fraud, ARS FRLs should be established, using:  
FRL 0 for restriction to internal dialing only  
FRL 2 for restriction to local network calling only  
FRL 3 for restriction to domestic long distance  
FRL 4 for international calling  
Each extension should be assigned the appropriate FRL to match its calling requirements.  
If  
Then  
A messaging port extension is not used for  
Outcalling  
It should be assigned to FRL 0 (the factory setting)  
Outcalling will be used for the MERLIN  
Messaging System  
For Release 2 or later, ports to be unrestricted or toll restricted  
are:  
Port 2 only on a 2-port system  
Port 4 only on a 4-port system  
Ports 5 and 6 only on a 6-port system  
Ports 7 and 8 only on a 8-port system  
Ports 9 and 10 only on a 10-port system  
Ports 11 and 12 only on a 12-port system  
For Release 1 and 1.1, ports to be unrestricted or toll restricted  
are:  
Port 2 only on a 2-port system  
Port 4 only on a 4-port system  
Port 6 only on a 6-port system  
Refer to your communications System Planning Form containing Call Restrictions and Lists  
information to identify the appropriate FRLs for system ports and other restrictions.  
Note:  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program Automatic Route Selection Restriction (ARS):  
Step To  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
4
5
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Display next page of menu  
Select Restriction  
/
ARS Restrict  
Enter the extension number of the  
MERLIN Messaging System port  
used for Outcalling  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
7
Erase restriction level  
or  
+
or  
Backspace  
Enter restriction level (0-6)  
[n]  
[n]  
Enter  
Exit/Back  
7
Return to System Programming menu  
Procedures  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Call Handling  
Programming Fax Call Handling information requires you to:  
Identify the extensions associated with fax machines.  
Identify the fax machine for each Automated Attendant, if applicable.  
Identify the extension that will receive the Message-Waiting indication when a fax is  
received.  
If more than one fax extension is specified for an Automated Attendant, you must create a Fax  
Calling Group for that Automated Attendant. This allows the MERLIN Messaging System to  
transfer fax calls immediately to an available fax machine assigned to the fax Calling Group.  
Fax Call Handling can be used with Immediate Call Handling only. Fax Call Handling cannot  
be used with Delayed Call Handling or Night Only Call Handling.  
Programming Required:  
Administering Fax Ports  
If you want more than one fax machine extension to be used for each Automated  
Attendant, create a Fax Calling Group and assign the fax extensions as members of the  
Creating a Fax Calling Group  
Identify the extension that will display a Message-Waiting light when a fax is received.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To administer fax ports:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
4
5
Select Auxiliary Equipment  
Select Fax  
AuxEquip  
Fax  
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Enter the fax machine extension  
number  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
7
Return to Fax menu  
Exit/Back  
Assign an extension to receive  
Message-Waiting indication  
Msg Waiting  
8
9
Identify fax machine extension number [nnn]  
sending the indication  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Enter  
Enter the extension number of the  
telephone you want to assign as the fax  
Message-Waiting Receiver  
[nnn]  
10 Repeat Step 9 as needed for up to 4  
extensions  
11 Return to Fax menu  
12 Select Threshold  
13 Erase current setting  
Exit/Back  
Threshold  
or  
Backspace  
14 Enter the number of seconds [0-30]  
[nn]  
[nn]  
Enter  
15 Return to System Programming menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a Fax Calling Group  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a Fax Calling Group  
If more than one fax machine is assigned to an Automated Attendant, you must use this  
procedure to assign the fax machines to a Calling Group.  
Refer to the communications System Planning Form containing information about  
System Numbering: Extension Jacks to determine the fax extension.  
Refer to the communications System Planning Form containing Group Calling  
information to determine the available Calling Group Numbers.  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To create a Fax Calling Group:  
Step Programming Task  
Programming Console  
PC  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Extensions  
2
3
4
5
6
Select Extensions  
Display next page of menu  
Select Group Calling  
Select Members  
/
Grp Calling  
Members  
Enter the extension number of the Calling [nnn]  
Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Enter  
7
Enter the Group Member (extension of  
the fax machine)  
[nnn]  
8
9
Repeat Step 7 as needed for each fax  
machine  
Exit  
Exit/Back  
10 Display next page of menu  
/
Group Type  
11 Select Group Type  
12 Enter the extension number of the Calling [nnn]  
[nnn]  
Group  
Enter  
Auto Login  
Enter  
13 Select Auto Login  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
14 Return to System Programming menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming MERLIN Messaging System Port Restrictions  
Unless a system port is used for Outcalling, the port must be restricted from making external  
calls. The following procedures deal with programming port restrictions.  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Touch-Tone Settings  
This section of the Online Guide describes the procedure for verifying the Touch-Tone  
Duration and Touch-Tone Interval.  
Confirming the Touch-Tone Interval  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Confirming the Touch-Tone Duration  
The Touch-Tone Duration defines the length of the Touch-Tone signals sent from the  
communications system to the MERLIN Messaging System. You must verify the Touch-Tone  
Duration factory setting of 100 milliseconds (ms).  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To confirm the Touch-Tone Duration:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
4
5
Select Auxiliary Equipment  
Select VMS/AA  
AuxEquip  
VMS/AA  
Select Touch-Tone Duration  
Choose an option:  
TT Duration  
Verify factory setting of 100 ms.  
If current setting is incorrect,  
erase the current setting and  
enter 100 ms.  
or  
+
or  
Backspace  
100  
100  
Enter  
If setting is correct, return to  
System Programming menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Procedure  
Confirming the Touch-Tone Interval  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To confirm the Touch-Tone Interval:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
4
5
Select Auxiliary Equipment  
Select VMS/AA  
AuxEquip  
VMS/AA  
Select Touch-Tone Interval  
TT Interval  
Choose an option:  
Verify factory setting of 100  
ms. If current setting is  
or  
+
or  
Backspace  
incorrect, erase the current  
setting and enter 100 ms.  
100  
100  
Enter  
If setting is correct, return to  
System Programming menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Confirming the Touch-Tone Duration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Confirming the Touch-Tone Interval  
The Touch-Tone Duration defines the time between Touch-Tone signals sent between the  
communications system and the MERLIN Messaging System. You must verify the  
Touch-Tone Duration factory setting of 100 milliseconds (ms).  
Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming the Message-Waiting Receiver  
When a Calling Group has a mailbox, it is useful to designate an extension as a Message-Waiting Receiver for  
the Calling Group. The Message-Waiting lights on the designated extension whenever a caller leaves a  
message for the Calling Group.  
To confirm the Message-Waiting Receiver:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
4
5
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
/
Display next page of menu  
Select Group Calling  
Grp Calling  
Message  
Select Message-Waiting Receiver  
6
7
8
9
To erase current setting  
or  
+
Backspace  
Enter the extension number of the  
Calling Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Enter the extension number of the  
telephone you want to assign as  
Message-Waiting Receiver  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Return to System Programming menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Labels  
You may program labels to identify your Calling Group and MERLIN Messaging System ports. This will  
cause the names you program to appear on display telephones when:  
The MERLIN Messaging System is dialed.  
A call is received or transferred from the MERLIN Messaging System.  
Refer to the communications System Planning Form containing System Numbering: Extension Jacks  
information to identify labels.  
To program labels:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
4
5
Display next page of menu  
Select Labeling  
/
Labeling  
Grp Calling  
Select Group Calling  
Enter the extension number of the  
MERLIN Messaging System Calling  
Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
"MERMSG" or some other  
designation that would identify the  
calling group  
[nnnnnnn]  
Enter  
[nnnnnnn]  
Exit/Back  
Directory  
7
8
9
Return to the previous menu  
Select Directory  
Select Extension  
Extensions  
10 Enter the extension number of the  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
MERLIN Messaging System port  
Enter  
11 To erase current current label  
or  
+
or  
Backspace  
12 Enter "MERMSG" or some other  
designation that would be meaningful  
for the MERLIN Messaging System  
[nnnnnnn]  
[nnnnnnn]  
Enter  
13 Save your entry  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
14 Repeat Steps 10-12 for each  
applicable MERLIN Messaging  
System port  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
15 Return to System Programming menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Optional Extension Features  
Although not required for basic operation of the MERLIN Messaging System, programming  
the optional communications system features described in this section will make it easier for  
users to use the MERLIN Messaging System.  
Programming Direct Voice Mail  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming an Auto Dial Button  
You can program an Auto Dial button to provide one-touch dialing into the MERLIN Messaging System.  
Auto Dial Button programming can be at the user’s telephone or through Centralized Telephone  
Programming. The Centralized Telephone Programming procedure is documented below.  
To program an Auto Dial button:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Display next page of menu  
/
Cntr-Prg  
Select Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
4
5
Select Program Extension  
Program Ext  
Enter the extension you want to  
program  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
7
Start Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Start  
Select line/feature button  
Press button on console  
or  
function key, then  
or  
+
8
Select Auto Dial Inside feature  
or  
ListFeature  
Function key,  
corresponding to Auto  
Dial  
AutoDial  
Inside  
Enter  
9
Enter the extension number of the [nnn]  
MERLIN Messaging System  
Calling Group  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10 Return to the System Programming  
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
menu  
Procedures  
Programming Direct Voice Mail  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming a Coverage VMS Off Button  
This feature prevents unanswered external calls from receiving coverage by the MERLIN Messaging System. It  
can be programmed at the user’s telephone or through Centralized Telephone Programming. The Centralized  
Telephone Programming procedure is documented below.  
To program a Coverage VMS Off button:  
Step  
Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Display next page of menu  
/
Select Centralized  
Cntr-Prg  
Telephone Programming  
4
5
Select Program Extension  
Program Ext  
Enter the extension you  
want to program  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
7
Start Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Start  
Select line/feature button  
Press button on console  
or  
or  
+ function  
key, then  
8
Select Coverage VMS Off  
feature  
or  
ListFeature  
/
Function key corresponding to  
CoverageVMS  
CoverageVMS  
9
Return to System  
Programming menu  
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Programming an Auto Dial Button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Coverage Inside Button  
Coverage Inside prevents or allows coverage of inside calls. If Coverage Inside Off is programmed, only outside calls are  
covered. Coverage Inside On allows both inside and outside calls to receive coverage. This feature can be programmed at  
the user’s telephone or through Centralized Telephone Programming. The Centralized Telephone Programming procedure  
is documented below.  
To program a Coverage Inside button:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Display next page of menu  
/
Cntr-Prg  
Select Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Program Ext  
4
5
Select Program Extension  
[nnn]  
Enter the extension you want [nnn]  
to program  
Enter  
Start  
6
7
Start Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Select line/feature button  
Press button on console  
or  
+ function  
key, then  
8
Choose an option:  
Coverage Inside Off  
Coverage Inside On  
or  
ListFeature  
/
Function corresponding to  
Cover Inside  
Cover Inside  
On or  
Off  
or  
Enter  
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
9
Return to System  
Programming menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Coverage VMS Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming a Direct Voice Mail Button  
Direct Voice Mail allows an inside caller to call directly or transfer a call directly to another user’s voice  
mailbox. It can be programmed at the user’s telephone or through Centralized Telephone Programming.  
The Centralized Telephone Programming procedure is documented below.  
To program a Direct Voice Mail button:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Display next page of menu  
/
Select Centralized  
Cntr-Prg  
Telephone Programming  
4
5
Select Program Extension  
ProgramExt  
Enter the extension you want [nnn]  
to program  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Start  
6
7
Start Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Select line/feature button  
Press button on console  
or  
or  
+ function  
key, then  
8
Select Direct VM feature  
or  
ListFeature  
/
Function key corresponding to  
Direct VM  
Direct VM  
9
Return to System  
Programming menu  
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Programming Coverage VMS Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming a Delete Message Button  
For all multiline telephones except MLX  
The Delete Message feature turns off a user’s Message-Waiting light and deletes the label that appears on the  
display. It does not delete voice mail messages. This feature can be programmed at the user’s telephone or  
through Centralized Telephone Programming. The Centralized Telephone Programming procedure is  
documented below.  
To program a Delete Message button:  
Step  
Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Display next page of menu  
/
Cntr-Prg  
Select Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Program Ext  
4
Select Program Extension  
5
6
Enter the extension you want to [nnn]  
program  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Start  
Start Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
7
8
Select line/feature button  
Press button on console  
or  
function key, then  
or  
+
Select Message Delete feature  
or  
ListFeature  
/
/
MsgDelete  
Function key  
corresponding to  
MsgDelete  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
9
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Programming Coverage VMS Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Ongoing Maintenance and Administration  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Managing the MERLIN Messaging System  
Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and Administration  
Upgrading MERLIN Messaging System Port Licensing  
MERLIN Messaging System User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Ongoing Maintenance and Administration  
Programming Conventions  
System Overview  
Managing the MERLIN Messaging System  
Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and Administration  
Upgrading MERLIN Messaging System Port Licensing  
MERLIN Messaging System User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
The MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide contains detailed information about the  
MERLIN Messaging System.  
You can use the Online Guide to:  
View and print MERLIN Messaging System Planning Forms.  
This section, Getting Started, will walk you through a brief explanation of the conventions  
and procedures used in the Online Guide and will help you to use this reference effectively.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customized "Paths" through Information/Procedures  
The MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide provides three customized "paths" through the  
Ongoing Maintenance and Administration  
This content helps you locate and access information based on the tasks you have to perform  
with respect to the system.  
Each path contains:  
Access to general information about the system.  
Detailed information and step-by-step instructions for completing the tasks specific to  
the selected path.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Navigation  
You can move from one topic to another in the Online Guide by activating topic-associated  
hypertext links. This can be done from:  
A topic listed in the Contents Panel on the left side of the screen  
The Technology Bar at the bottom of the screen  
Within the topic text  
The Contents Panel  
The Contents Panel is displayed along the left side of the window. It provides a way for you to  
quickly identify and access the information you need to locate. Because it is displayed in a  
stationary part of the window (that is, it doesn’t change or move), you can easily locate the topic  
you want to view. Note that the arrow pinpoints your current location in the topic listing.  
The Technology Bar  
The Technology Bar located at the lower right-hand corner of the screen contains a number of  
icons. Each icon is responsible for a different navigational action.  
Icon  
Action  
Redisplays the Main menu options in the Contents Panel  
Links to the previous topic in the sequence  
Takes you to the top of the window  
Links to the next topic in the sequence  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
An element that triggers a change on an item (usually a graphic) in a Web page when the mouse passes over it. The change usually signifies that the item is a link to related or  
additional information.  
Pop-Up Windows  
The MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide makes use of pop-up windows and mouseovers (through which  
your movement of the cursor over a screen object or image initiates another display or activity) or to provide  
additional information. Typically, pop-up windows and mouseovers contain material that supplements  
information appearing in the main window (for example, a more detailed explanation, a link to a Glossary term, a  
field description, etc.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Button Bar  
The Button Bar is displayed in a non-scrolling panel across the top of the screen. It provides  
access to additional online features and capabilities. To view a feature or access a capability, click  
the associated button. Note that in the case of features displayed in pop-up windows (for example,  
the Glossary), you must close the window before you can proceed.  
Button  
Action  
Redisplays the Main menu  
options in the Contents  
Panel  
Allows you to search for  
information by entering a  
key word  
Links you to the MERLIN  
Messaging System Glossary  
Provides access to the  
online Help feature  
Displays a table containing  
Touch Tones and rules  
which are valid for all  
menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Conventions  
The procedures for programming the MERLIN Messaging System in this Online Guide use  
several conventions to indicate what the steps involve. The conventions are described in the  
following table:  
Typeface Sample  
Meaning  
To select this option, press this imprinted button on the  
console  
GrpCalling  
To select this menu option, press the unlabeled display button  
next to the option  
[nnn]  
Enter the variable information in brackets  
Press this key on the PC  
Press this function key on the PC  
+
On the PC, hold down the first key and press the second key  
Continuation of procedures  
That completes the walk-through of the MERLIN Messaging System Online Guide. To begin  
accessing information related to your selected path, click one of the topics listed in the Contents  
Panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Contents  
Ongoing Maintenance and Administration  
Getting Started  
Introduction  
Services and  
Features  
System Capacities  
System  
Components  
Environmental  
Requirements  
Programmer  
Responsibilities  
Personnel  
Responsibilities  
Features  
Managing the MERLIN Messaging System  
Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and Administration  
Upgrading MERLIN Messaging System Port Licensing  
MERLIN Messaging System User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PCMCIA Slots  
The left-most PCMCIA slot houses the 2-Port, 4-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, 10-Port, or 12-Port PC  
Card required for operation of the MERLIN Messaging System.  
NOTE: Only the left-most of the two PCMCIA slots can be used. The right-most slot is  
reserved for future use.  
The 2-Port, 4-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, 10-Port, or 12-Port PC Card contains:  
Port licensing data that triggers the activation of the appropriate number of voice  
messaging ports.  
A Remote Maintenance Device (RMD), used for remote access to diagnostic and  
maintenance features of the system.  
Media for performing system backup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
MERLIN Messaging System Release 2 is an embedded voice messaging system housed in a module (circuit  
pack) that plugs into the switch's carrier. Release 2 is available in a 2-, 4-, 6-, 8-, 10-, or 12-Port configuration.  
Release 1 and 1.1 is available in a 2-, 4-, or 6-Port configuration. For a description of each module component,  
move the mouse pointer over the graphic below.  
Port Level LEDs:  
The port-specific LEDs indicate the current status of each voice messaging  
port. The possible variations are:  
Not available  
In service and idle  
In service and in use  
Note: The port-specific LEDs that correspond, to voice messaging ports  
are in ascending order (that is, from the bottom up).  
RS232 Port:  
This is a serial port used for local access to the MERLIN Messaging System via a PC or  
laptop computer for report, maintenance and administrative purposes. Access to the  
MERLIN Messaging System using the RS-232 port is both login and password protected.  
System Status LED:  
This LED reflects the status of the MERLIN Messaging System. The LED  
displays red, green or amber light to indicate various stages of system  
status and readiness (for example, booting, self-test failure, system  
upgrade in progress, etc.).  
Local Area Network (LAN) Connection:  
This port is used to connect the system to a LAN (Release 2 or later).  
Port Status LEDs:  
The port-specific LEDs on the MERLIN Messaging System faceplate indicate  
the current status of each voice messaging port. The possible variations  
are:  
Not available  
In service and idle  
In service and in use  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The port-specific LEDs that correspond to voice messaging ports are  
in ascending order (that is, from the bottom up).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Allows mailbox owners to:  
Record and send messages.  
Listen to messages.  
Foward and reply to messages.  
Record their names or Personal Greetings  
Activate a Personal Greeting.  
Change their Personal Operators.  
Change their passwords.  
Set up Outcalling (if permission provided).  
Create Personal Group Lists.  
Change Call Answer mode.  
Transfer to another extension.  
Allows individuals responsible for programming the MERLIN Messaging System to:  
Administer System Parameters such as System Language mode and System Date  
and Time.  
Administer an extension to be either a Mailbox, Fax, Transfer-Only or Automated  
Attendant Extension.  
Administer up to four Automated Attendants.  
Administer System Security Options.  
Administer System Group Lists (Release 2 or later).  
Perform a System Backup or System Restore.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Answers incoming lines and presents callers with a list of options. Based on callers'  
input, they may be:  
Transferred to an extension.  
Played an informational announcement.  
Transferred to a voice mailbox.  
Presented with a submenu containing additional options.  
The Automated Attendant Service can also detect and route fax calls to a  
predetermined fax extension.  
Functions as a personal answering machine, allowing a caller to:  
Hear the Personal Greeting recorded by the mailbox owner.  
Switch to the alternate language, if the system is configured in Bilingual mode.  
Leave a voice message, if this capability has been programmed by the mailbox  
owner.  
Optionally designate voice message as a priority or private message (Release 2 or  
later).  
Transfer to an operator or to another extension.  
Provides on-site and remote system serviceability functionality, including:  
Terminal-based reporting  
Trouble/fault isolation  
Backup and Restoration  
The MERLIN Messaging System can operate in either Monolingual or Bilingual mode. In  
Monolingual mode, all system prompts are played in one of the following languages:  
U.S. English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
In Milingual mode, the caller can choose to hear prompts in either the Primary or  
Secondary language.  
Services and Features  
For a description of each MERLIN Messaging System service or feature, move the mouse  
pointer over the graphic below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration  
There is one common module (circuit pack) for all six MERLIN Messaging System  
configurations (that is, a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port configuration). A  
2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port PC Card, included with each system, contains  
the following components:  
Port licensing for the system's port configuration (that is, a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port,  
10-port, or 12-port configuration).  
Media for backing up and restoring the system  
A 14.4 kbps Remote Maintenance Device (modem) used for remote diagnostics  
For Release 1 and 1.1, one common module supports three configurations (that is, a 2-port,  
4-port, or 6-port configuration). A 2-port, 4-port, or 6-port PC Card is included with each  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Assignments  
The communications system assigns logical IDs and extensions to each port on the MERLIN  
Messaging System module. The first logical ID and extension assigned to the MERLIN Messaging  
System module is assigned to Port 1, the second to Port 2, etc. The communications system assigns 12  
logical IDs and extensions to the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
In Release 2 or later, if a Message-Waiting Light (MWL) update or Outcalling action needs to be  
performed, the following ports are used:  
Port 2 on a 2-port system  
Port 4 on a 4-port system  
Ports 5 and 6 on a 6-port system  
Ports 7 and 8 on an 8-port system  
Ports 9 and 10 on a 10-port system  
Ports 11 and 12 on a 12-port system  
The Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) is not assigned to a dedicated logical ID and extension.  
The following table defines the Port Assignments for the MERLIN Messaging System Release 2 or  
later.  
Ports  
7
System  
Configuration  
1 2  
3
4
5
6
8
9
10  
11  
12  
2-port  
V V N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E  
4-port  
6-port  
8-port  
10-port  
12-port  
V V V  
V V V  
V V V  
V V V  
V V V  
V
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E N/E  
V
V
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E N/E N/E  
V
V
V
V
N/E N/E  
V
V
V = Voice  
N/E = Not Equipped  
In Release 1 or 1.1, if a Message-Waiting Light (MWL) update or Outcalling action needs to be  
performed, the following ports are used:  
Port 2 on a 2-port system  
Port 4 on a 4-port system  
Port 6 on a 6-port system  
The Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) is assigned to the twelfth logical ID and extension.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System LEDs  
The MERLIN Messaging System module faceplate contains:  
One system status LED  
One LED for each of the voice ports  
The color(s) and status (that is, on, off or blinking) of the LEDs provide information regarding the  
operation of the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
The table below provides a description of the port-level and system status LED display variations.  
Display Meaning  
Port-Level LEDs  
Port not available for use (off)  
Port in service and idle (on-hook)  
Port in use (off-hook)  
System Status LED  
System is not powered up or there is a fault condition  
System is in a ready state (off-hook; speaking or recording; receiving Touch Tones)  
There is a self-test failure or system is out-of-service  
There is a self-test failure or system is out-of-service  
System software is being upgraded  
Hard disk is active  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Capacities  
The following table provides a summary of MERLIN Messaging System capacities.  
| System Parameters | Extensions | Automated Attendants | System Security | User Options |  
Feature  
Capacity  
Factory Settings  
System Administration Prompt Language  
U.S. English, Latin American  
U.S. English  
Spanish, Canadian French,  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release  
2 or later)  
System Parameters  
System Language  
U.S. English, Latin American  
Spanish, Canadian French,  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release  
2 or later)  
U.S. English  
Language Mode  
Call Answer Service Operator  
General Mailbox Owners  
Maximum Extension Length  
Message Storage  
Monolingual or Bilingual  
1 maximum  
Monolingual  
Ext. 768  
10 (total)  
2 digits  
N/A  
1 per General Mailbox  
2, 3 or 4 digits  
100 hours  
Extensions  
Mailbox Extensions  
200 maximum for any port  
None  
configuration  
Maximum Number of  
120 messages  
N/A  
Messages per Mailbox  
Mailbox Size  
5 – 180 minutes  
(administered per  
mailbox)  
20 minutes  
Message Length  
Mailbox Language  
2 – 60 minutes  
(administered per  
mailbox)  
4 minutes  
U.S. English, Latin  
American Spanish,  
Canadian French,  
System/Primary  
Language  
Brazilian Portuguese  
(Release 2 or later)  
Outcalling Permission  
On or Off  
400 maximum  
10 maximum  
Off  
None  
None  
Transfer-Only Extensions  
Automated Attendant  
Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax Extensions  
4 (One for each Automated  
Attendant; Fax Extensions  
can be shared by multiple  
Automated Attendants)  
None  
General Mailbox  
4 (one for each Automated  
9991, 9992, 9993, 9994  
Attendant)  
Automated Attendants  
Number of Automated  
4 maximum  
4  
Attendants  
Modes of Operation  
2 (Day mode and Night  
N/A  
mode)  
Submenus  
99 maximum  
None  
Announcements  
Schedule Controller  
99 maximum  
None  
Follow Switch mode, Weekly  
Switch Mode  
Business Schedule or both  
Main menu Prompts,  
Submenu Prompts and  
Announcements  
2 minutes in length maximum  
N/A  
for each  
Number of Line Assignments  
System Security  
80 per Messaging System  
N/A  
Minimum Password Length  
Maximum Password Length  
Transfer Restrictions  
0 –15 digits  
15 digits  
6 digits  
15 digits (fixed)  
On  
On or Off  
System Group Lists  
10 maximum with up to  
50 mailbox extensions in  
each list  
N/A  
User Options  
Outcalling Telephone/Pager  
Numbers (administered by  
user)  
5 maximum  
N/A  
Outcalling Cycles  
1–9  
3  
Outcalling Interval  
Outcalling Schedule  
Outcalling Activation  
5 – 99 minutes  
Range is 0000 – 2359  
15 minutes  
24 hours  
All messages  
Outcalling for all  
messages or priority  
messages only  
Personal Greetings (recorded  
6 maximum  
System Greeting  
by user)  
Group Lists (administered by  
10 maximum with up to 50  
N/A  
user)  
extensions in each list  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Personal Operator  
1 per user  
Call Answer Service  
Operator  
Call Answer Mode  
Record mode or  
Record mode  
answer-only mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Components  
The MERLIN Messaging System module resides in a slot in the communications system carrier.  
One common module supports a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port configuration. (In  
Release 1 or 1.1, the module supports a 2-port, 4-port, or 6-port configuration.)  
Component  
Module  
Description  
LEDs  
One LED indicates system status and one LED  
for each port indicates port status. See the  
MERLIN Messaging System Installation,  
Programming, and Troubleshooting Online  
Guide for more information about the LEDs.  
RS-232 Serial Port  
Used to directly connect a PC or laptop to the  
system.  
Local Area Network  
Used to connect the system to a LAN (Release  
(LAN) connection  
2 or later).  
PCMCIA Slots  
10-port, or 12-port PC card. Only the left-most  
slot should be used.  
Touch-Tone Receivers (TTRs)  
Two TTRs serve as communications system  
resources (an internal component of the  
module).  
PC Card  
The PC Cards provide:  
Remote Maintenance Device (RMD).  
Media for performing system backup.  
2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or  
12-port PC Card  
Port licensing required for the 2-port, 4-port,  
6-port, 8-port, 10-port, or 12-port  
configuration.  
Port LEDs  
The port LEDs are single lights which function according to the configuration. For example, in a  
2-port configuration, only the LEDs for Port 1 and Port 2 operate while, in an 8-port configuration,  
LEDs for Ports 1 through 8 operate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Environmental Requirements  
For proper operations, the MERLIN Messaging installation site must meet the environmental  
requirements described in the table below.  
Condition  
Requirement  
Relative Humidity 15% - 90% non-condensing  
Temperature Range 32° F to 122° F (0° C to 50° C)  
Air Quality  
Dust-free area (preferably in an office environment)  
Environment  
Power Supply  
No exposure to liquids. Avoid areas near drinking fountains, coffee makers, etc.  
For the USA, Canada and other countries that use a USA-type outlet (nominal voltage 117  
VAC), the communications system must have a 391A3 or newer power supply module  
installed in the same carrier in which the MERLIN Messaging System module is installed.  
In countries with nominal voltage of 220 VAC, a 391B2 or newer power supply module is  
required in the same carrier in which the MERLIN Messaging System module is installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installer and Programmer Responsibilities  
The individual installing and programming the MERLIN Messaging System is responsible for  
the following tasks:  
Installing the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
Programming the MERLIN Messaging System module to provide the services specified  
by the customer.  
Programming the communications system to support MERLIN Messaging System  
operation.  
Reviewing configuration reports to ensure that all system parameters, line assignments,  
Automated Attendant menus and Announcements are correct and current.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Company Personnel Responsibilities  
Before the MERLIN Messaging System is programmed, company personnel should be  
designated to serve in the following support roles:  
General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Manager Responsibilities  
The System Manager is responsible for performing the following routine maintenance tasks:  
Maintaining Voice Mailboxes, for example:  
Adding and deleting voice mailboxes.  
Resetting (initializing) voice mailbox passwords when forgotten.  
Changing user's mailbox language.  
Maintaining Transfer-Only, Automated Attendant and Fax Extensions.  
Changing Automated Attendant Menus, Announcements and Line Assignments to  
reflect changes in line assignment, personnel, company operations or company services.  
Maintaining the Automated Attendant Schedule to assure that the appropriate  
Automated Attendant menus and announcements are played in connection with holidays  
and temporary company closings or openings.  
Maintaining System Parameters to make system-wide changes (for example, changing  
date and time, the Call Answer Service Operator extension or General Mailbox  
Owners).  
Maintaining System Security by responding to user inquiries and by taking measures  
to prevent toll fraud and to safeguard the contents of mailboxes.  
Performing System Backups periodically or when changes are made to the MERLIN  
Messaging System.  
Maintaining Directory Listings to reflect changes in personnel.  
Reviewing Configuration Reports to ensure that all system parameters, line  
assignments, Automated Attendant menus and Announcements are current and correct.  
General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Call Answer Service (CAS) Operator Responsibilities  
In Automated Attendant Service, the Dial 0/Timeout Action is set to CAS Operator  
and:  
Caller presses  
.
Caller makes no selection.  
Caller presses  
Caller presses  
while using the directory to transfer.  
, then  
to transfer.  
In Voice Mail Service:  
User presses  
, then  
.
Caller presses  
while using the directory to transfer.  
In Call Answer Service:  
Caller presses  
or  
, then  
while the greeting is playing and the  
extension does not have Personal Operator.  
Mailbox is in Answer-Only mode without a Personal Operator and caller presses  
or  
, then  
during the five-second timeout following the greeting.  
Caller presses  
or  
, then before or after leaving a message in a  
mailbox that does not have a Personal Operator.  
Caller presses while using the directory to transfer.  
The factory setting for the Call Answer Service Operator is 768. It is recommended that you do  
not change the factory setting.  
General Mailbox Owner(s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Mailbox Owner Responsibilities  
A person designated as a General Mailbox Owner is responsible for forwarding messages left  
in the General Mailbox to the intended user's mailbox.  
Action has been set to "Record a Message in the General Mailbox" and the caller does any of  
the following:  
The caller presses  
from an Automated Attendant Main menu, submenu or an  
announcement.  
The caller makes no Touch-Tone response to an Automated Attendant main menu or  
submenu.  
The caller presses  
while using the Directory to transfer.  
Call Answer Service Operator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security Features  
The MERLIN Messaging System includes security features to help protect your system from  
toll fraud abuse. These features include:  
A Transfer Restriction capability that allows the System Manager to restrict call transfer  
destinations only to those extensions administered by the System Manager.  
A Minimum Password Length setting that allows the System Manager to choose a  
minimum length for the passwords of users' voice mailboxes. A Minimum Password  
Length setting of at least six digits is recommended.  
Password Protection for Mailboxes and the Diagnostic and Maintenance Interface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Ongoing Maintenance and Administration  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Backing Up and Restoring the System  
Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and Administration  
Upgrading MERLIN Messaging System Port Licensing  
MERLIN Messaging System User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview  
Managing the System  
The following procedures describe the routine tasks required to manage the MERLIN  
Messaging System. Use these procedures to modify system programming after the MERLIN  
Messaging System has been installed and initially administered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Logging in to System Administration  
described in Initially Logging in to System Administration.  
Logging in to System Administration  
Step  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
Dial extension number of MERLIN Messaging System [nnn]  
Calling Group.  
2
Enter System Administration extension number.  
3
4
Enter password.  
[nnnnnn]  
Select System Administration.  
This option is not heard on the System  
Administration activity menu. The menu item is  
deliberately hidden to minimize your system's  
Note:  
vulnerability to abuse. You should select it even  
though it is not heard.  
Changing the System Administration Prompt Language  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the System Administration Password  
It is recommended that you change the System Administration password after you complete the  
initial administration of the MERLIN Messaging System or after a service technician has  
accessed your system and you have provided the technician with the password. You can also  
change the System Administration password through the terminal interface.  
Changing the System Administration password after you complete initial  
programming is strongly recommended to protect the security of the system.  
To change the System Administration Password  
Step  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
Dial extension number of MERLIN Messaging  
System Calling Group.  
[nnn]  
Enter System Administration extension number.  
3
4
5
6
Enter password.  
[nnnnnn]  
Select Change Password.  
Enter password.  
[nnnnnn]  
[nnnnnn]  
Re-enter password.  
Changing the System Administration Prompt Language  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the System Administration Prompt Language  
Use this procedure to change the language you hear when you administer the system.  
To change the System Administration Prompt Language  
Step  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
Dial extension number of MERLIN Messaging  
System Calling Group  
[nnn]  
2
Enter System Administration extension number  
Enter password  
3
4
5
[nnnnnn]  
Select System Administration Prompt Language  
Choose one of the following:  
U.S. English  
or  
or  
or  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
Changing the System Administration Password  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifying System Parameters  
Modifying system parameters involves making system-wide changes to reflect changes in  
personnel or changes in telephone configuration. The following are the procedures for  
Programming Maximum Extension Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming System Language Mode and System Language  
The System Language is the language callers hear. It can be set to one of three languages: U.S.  
English, Latin American Spanish or Canadian French. The System Language Mode can be set to  
Monolingual or Bilingual. When the System Language Mode is set to Monolingual, callers hear  
system prompts in one of the three languages (the language that is programmed as the System  
Language). When the System Language Mode is set to Bilingual, callers hear system prompts in  
two of the three languages. The first language the caller hears is the Primary Language. The  
Secondary Language is the alternate language the caller can hear by pressing  
. When a  
system is in Bilingual mode, the user includes in their personal greeting instructions for the caller  
to press  
to hear system prompts in the alternate language.  
The System Language Mode and System Language apply  
to all Automated Attendants.  
Note:  
The MERLIN Messaging System factory settings for System  
Language Mode and System Language are Monolingual and U.S.  
English.  
Refer to System Planning Form 1 – System Parameters for the  
System Language Mode and System Language that applies to your  
site.  
Setting System Language Mode  
The factory-set System Language Mode for a new system is Monolingual. Use the following  
procedure to change the Language Mode to Bilingual, if required.  
To program the System Language Mode:  
Step  
1
Touch-Tone Input  
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Parameters  
Select System Language Mode  
Select Language Mode  
2
3
4
5
Select Bilingual  
Setting System Language  
The factory-set System Llanguage for a new Monolingual System is U.S. English. If the language  
mode has been changed to Bilingual, the default Primary Language is U.S. English and the  
default Secondary language is Latin American Spanish. Use the following procedure to:  
Change the System Language in a Monolingual System.  
Change the Inital primary and/or Secondary Languages in a Bilingual System.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Step  
1
Touch-Tone Input  
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
2 Select System Parameters  
3
4
5
Select System Language Mode  
Select System Language  
For Monolingual  
For Bilingual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For Monolingual Mode  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Select option:  
Listen to language  
Accept language setting (Monolingual  
or  
procedure is complete)  
Modify language  
Choose one of the following:  
U.S. English  
(Select one:)  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
confirm  
cancel  
or  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For Bilingual Mode  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Choose one of the following:  
Primary Language  
Secondary Language  
If finished  
or  
or  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to language  
Accept Language setting  
or  
Modify language  
Choose one of the following:  
U.S. English  
(Select one:)  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
Confirm Language  
Cancel update  
or  
8
9
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for secondary language  
End language selection  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Date and Time  
You must set the system date and time. These parameters cannot be set independently of each other; both date and  
time must be set.  
To program the Date and Time:  
Step  
1
Touch-Tone Input  
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
2
3
4
Select System Parameters  
Select System Date and Time  
Choose one of the following:  
Enter date  
Example: February 26, 2000 = 022600  
[mmddyy]  
or  
Keep current date  
5
Choose one of the following:  
[hhmm]  
or  
Enter time (24-hour clock)  
Example: 3:45PM = 1545  
Keep current time  
6
Choose one of the following:  
Approve  
or  
Re-enter  
(Return to Step 4)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming the Call Answer Service Operator Extension  
transferred in a number of situations. Click here for a list of CAS Operator transfer criteria.  
The factory setting for the Call Answer Service Operator is 768.  
It is recommended that you do not change the factory setting.  
Note:  
Refer to System Planning Form 1 – System Parameters for the CAS Operator Extension  
identified for your site.  
To program the CAS Operator extension:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Parameters  
Select Call Answer Service Operator  
Enter Call Answer Service Operator extension  
[nnn]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming the General Mailbox Owner(s)  
The MERLIN Messaging System provides four General Mailboxes — one for each Automated Attendant.  
The General Mailbox Owner is the extension whose Message-Waiting light is turned on whenever a message is  
placed in the General Mailbox. The factory setting for the General Mailbox Owner is Extension 10. You can  
General Mailboxes.  
Refer to System Planning Planning Form 1 - System Parameters for the General Mailbox  
Owner extension(s) identified for your site.  
Step  
1
Touch-Tone Input  
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Parameters  
2
3
4
Select General Mailbox Owner  
Enter Automated Attendant number  
-
5
6
Enter General Mailbox Owner's extension  
[nnn]  
Repeat Steps 3–5 for each Automated Attendant  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Maximum Extension Length  
dial plan. The factory setting is two digits. The MERLIN Messaging System transfers calls:  
When the number of digits entered by the caller equals the Maximum Extension Length.  
After the caller presses digits and , indicating they have finished entering an extension.  
After the caller has entered digits and the 5-second timeout period has expired.  
Refer to System Planning Form 1 – System Parameters for the Maximum Extension Length  
identified for your system.  
To program the Maximum Extension Length:  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Parameters  
Select Maximum Extension Length  
Enter maximum number of digits  
or  
or  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifying Extension Programming  
Modifying extension programming includes making changes due to personnel changes, user  
preference or company requirements.  
Fax Extensions  
Extensions use the following procedures:  
Delete a Mailbox Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing a Directory Listing or Recorded Name  
Use this procedure to change the Directory Listing or Recorded Name for a Mailbox Extension.  
Users and callers can use a four-letter Directory Listing to address or transfer calls. The mailbox  
user's name can also be recorded. The System Manager and the mailbox user can record a name,  
but only the System Manager can administer a Directory Listing for an extension.  
For better recording quality when recording a name, speak into the telephone handset  
instead of using a speakerphone.  
Note:  
To change a Directory Listing or Recorded Name:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
4
Select Administer Directory Listing or Recorded Name,  
then do the following:  
Select Record Name  
Record name; then after recording, press 1 and  
choose one of the following:  
[record name]  
— Approve name  
— Play back recorded name  
— Re-record name  
or  
or  
or  
— Delete name just recorded  
Administer Directory Listing  
Select Enter Directory Listing, then enter up to  
first ten letters of name in Release 1 or 1.1,  
enter up to first four letters of name). Then  
choose one of the following:  
— Approve  
— Re-enter  
[nn nn nn nn]  
or  
5
If finished administering Directory Listing and Recorded  
Name  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Mailbox Language  
Use this procedure to change the Mailbox Language. The Mailbox Language is the language the  
user hears after logging in. The factory-set Mailbox Language is the same as the System  
Language, if the system is in Monolingual mode or it is the same as the Primary Language, if the  
system is in Bilingual mode.  
User mailboxes can be administered for any of the supported languages, regardless of the mode or  
language(s) that have been programmed for the system.  
To change the Mailbox Language:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
Select Mailbox Language  
Select Modify Mailbox Language  
Choose one of the following:  
U.S. English  
or  
or  
or  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Brazilian Portuguese (Release 2 or later)  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Confirm  
or  
Cancel  
Delete Mailbox Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Mailbox Size  
Use this procedure to change the Mailbox Size. The Mailbox Size can be programmed to be  
5-180 minutes. The factory setting is 20 minutes. The Mailbox Size is the maximum amount of  
storage time available in a user's mailbox.  
To change the Mailbox Size:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
Select Message Length and Mailbox Size  
Change Message Length and Mailbox Size  
Skip Message Length  
Enter maximum Mailbox Size  
[nnn]  
Choose one of the following:  
Approve. Procedure is finished.  
Re-enter. Return to Step 6.  
or  
Delete Mailbox Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reinitializing a Mailbox Password  
Use this procedure to reinitialize a user's mailbox password. For occasions when the user has  
forgotten the mailbox password, this procedure allows you to remove that password from the  
mailbox so that the user can create a new one. Mailbox parameters and messages are retained.  
Note: The Directory Listing and name for the mailbox are retained after the mailbox password is  
reinitalized.  
To reinitialize a Mailbox Password:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
Select Reinitialize Password. Password is reset to  
factory setting.  
Delete Mailbox Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reinitializing a Mailbox  
Use this procedure to reinitialize a mailbox. Reinitializing a mailbox sets all mailbox parameters  
to the factory settings. Except for phone status setting.  
Factory-Set Mailbox Parameters  
Parameter  
Factory Settings  
Blank  
Directory Listing  
Recorded Name  
Personal Greeting  
Mailbox Size  
Message Length  
Language  
Blank  
System  
20 minutes  
4 minutes  
System Language  
No Outcalling Privilege  
Record  
Outcalling  
Call Answer Mode  
Password  
Blank  
Personal Operator  
Group Lists  
None  
None  
System Group Lists  
None  
To reinitialize a Mailbox:  
Step  
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
or  
Select Reinitialize Mailbox  
Choose one of the following:  
Confirm  
Cancel  
Change Mailbox Language  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Delete Mailbox Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning Lines to the Voice Port Used for Outcalling  
If outcalling is used for the communications system operating in Key mode, you must assign one or  
more outsides line to the MERLIN Messaging System ports used for Outcalling (port 2 on a 2-port  
system, port 4 on a 4-port system or port 6 on a 6-port system). You must also set the lines to no ring to  
ensure proper operation.  
To add an outside line to the extension used for Outcalling in Key mode:  
Step Programming Task  
Programming Console  
PC  
1
Enter programming mode  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
[any key]  
2
3
4
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Select Lines/Trunks  
Lines/Trunks  
Enter the extension number you want [nnn]  
to program  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Press line button or  
console  
5
Add the Outcalling line assignments  
by selecting each line button and  
turning on the green Message-Waiting  
light  
or  
+ function key  
Exit/Back  
6
7
Press Exit when you have finished  
adding the Outcalling lines to that  
extension  
Return to System Programming menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Setting the Outcalling Lines to No Ring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating a MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group  
You must create a MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group and assign the Group Members (MERLIN  
Messaging ports).  
To create a Calling Group and assign Group Members:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input Selection  
PC Input Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
[any key]  
2
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
3
4
Display next menu page  
Select Group Calling  
Grp Calling  
Members  
5
6
Select Members  
Enter the extension of the MERLIN [nnnn]  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
Enter  
Enter  
7
Messaging System Calling Group  
8
9
Repeat Step 7 for all active MERLIN  
Messaging System voice ports  
Confirm that all members are entered  
in the correct order  
10  
11  
12  
Return to the Group Calling menu  
Select Hunt Type  
Exit  
Hunt Type  
Enter the extension of the MERLIN [nnnn]  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnnn]  
Enter/Back  
13  
Specify Linear Hunt Group  
Linear  
Enter  
14  
15  
Display next menu page  
Select Group Type  
Group Type  
Enter  
16  
Enter the extension of the MERLIN [nnn]  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnn]  
17  
Select Integrated VMI  
Integ VMI  
Enter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
18  
Return to the System Programming  
menu  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
Setting the Outcalling Lines to No Ring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Outcalling Permission  
When Outcalling permission is On, the user can program up to five telephone numbers or  
pager/beeper numbers for the messaging system to call in order to notify a user that a new  
message has arrived in their voice mailbox.  
To change Outcalling Permission:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
or  
Select Outcalling  
Choose one of the following:  
Turn Outcalling On  
Turn Outcalling Off  
Delete Mailbox Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Phone Status  
Use this procedure to change the Phone Status of a mailbox extension. If a telephone is associated  
with the mailbox extension, calls are sent to the extension's telephone when callers transfer from  
the MERLIN Messaging System to that extension. If a telephone is not associated with the  
mailbox extension, calls are sent directly to the extension's mailbox when callers transfer from the  
MERLIN Messaging System to that extension.  
To change the Phone Status:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
2
3
4
5
[nnn]  
or  
Change Phone Status  
Choose one of the following:  
If a telephone is associated with this  
extension  
If a telephone is not associated with this  
extension  
Delete Mailbox Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Deleting a Mailbox Extension  
Use this procedure to delete a mailbox extension.  
To delete a Mailbox Extension:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
Delete this extension number  
5
Choose one of the following:  
Confirm  
or  
Cancel  
Change Phone Status  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Maximum Message Length  
Use this procedure to change the Maximum Message Length. The Maximum Message Length can  
be programmed to be 2-60 minutes. The factory setting is 4 minutes. Maximum Message Length  
is the maximum amount of time available for a caller to leave a message and for a user to create a  
message.  
To change the Maximum Message Length:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
[nn]  
or  
Select Message Length and Mailbox Size  
Change Message Length and Mailbox Size  
Enter Maximum Message Length  
Skip Mailbox Size  
Choose one of the following:  
Approve. Procedure is finished.  
Re-enter. Return to Step 6.  
Delete a Mailbox Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifying a Day or Night Menu  
Use this procedure to modify the Day or Night menu prompt, the Selector Codes and the Dial  
0/Timeout Action of an Automated Attendant Day or Night menu.  
To modify a Day or Night Menu:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Enter Automated Attendant number  
[1-4]  
or  
Choose one of the following:  
Day menu  
Night Menu  
5
6
Select Modify the Menu  
If you want to modify a Selector Code, enter that Selector  
[1-9]  
Code. Otherwise, go to Step 8.  
7
Modify Selector Code. Then choose one of the following  
Selector Code Actions:  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
_ _ _ _ _  
Selector Code transfer  
+ ext. number +  
or  
_
Play submenu  
_
+ submenu number  
Play announcement  
+
+
or  
_
Direct extension transfer  
+ announce. number  
or  
_
Mailbox transfer  
or_  
_
Delete Selector Code  
To modify another Selector Code, return to beginning of step  
7.  
+ mailbox ext.  
number +  
or  
8
step. Otherwise, go to Step 10.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9
Change Dial 0/Timeout Action, then choose one of the  
following actions:  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
or_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
_
Transfer to Call Answer Service Operator  
_
_ _ _  
or_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
_ _ _  
or _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
_ _ _ _  
+ ext. number +  
or_ _ _ _  
+ mailbox ext.  
number + or  
Transfer to General Mailbox  
_
Disconnect  
_
Transfer to extension  
_
Transfer to mailbox  
_
If finished (exit without changing Dial 0/Timeout  
action)  
10  
11  
If finished modifying menu definition  
You must continue with either Step 11 or Step 12 and  
follow the instructions to save the menu definitions  
and menu prompts.  
Note:  
If system is in Bilingual mode, go to Step 12. If system is in _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
Monolingual mode, choose one of the following:  
Record a new prompt; then after recording, press 1  
[record new  
and choose one of the following:  
prompt]  
— Approve  
or  
— Listen to prompt  
or  
— Re-record prompt  
or  
— Delete recording  
Use existing menu prompt and save menu definition  
changes. For Monolingual mode, procedure is  
finished.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12  
If system is in Bilingual mode, choose one of the following: _  
Primary Language  
Secondary Language  
or  
or  
Save menu definition and menu prompt changes  
13  
Record a new prompt; then after recording, press 1 and  
choose one of the following:  
[record new prompt]  
or  
Approve. Return to Step 12.(For Secondary Language)  
Listen to recording. Return to Step 12.  
Re-record recording. Return to Step 12.  
Delete recording. Return to Step 12.(For Secondary  
or  
or  
Language)  
Deleting Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating Submenus  
The Automated Attendant Day and Night Main menus provide callers with nine options (or  
choices). If you need to provide more than nine options, you must create a submenu from which a  
caller can select additional options.  
The MERLIN Messaging System allows up to 99 submenus shared among all Automated  
Attendants. A submenu:  
Can be assigned to one or more Automated Attendants.  
Can be up to two minutes in length.  
Uses the same Dial 0/Timeout Action defined for the Day or Night Main menu, to which it  
is assigned.  
To create a submenu:  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select Submenus  
[1–4]  
Enter submenu number  
[1-99]  
6
Choose an option:  
Create a submenu  
Cancel  
Deleting Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To create a submenu:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to submenu  
Modify submenu  
Delete a submenu, then choose one of the  
following:  
Confirm deletion  
Cancel deletion  
If finished  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To listen to a submenu:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
8
Choose one of the following:  
If the system is in Monolingual mode, listen to submenu  
prompt:  
If system is in Bilingual mode:  
Listen to submenu prompt in Primary Language  
Listen to submenu prompt in Secondary Language  
Listen to submenu definition  
If finished  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To modify a submenu:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
9
Choose one of the following:  
Enter Selector Code, then choose one of the  
[1–9]  
following:  
Modify Selector Code, then choose one of  
the following:  
+ ext. number +  
or  
Selector Code transfer  
Play submenu  
+ submenu number +  
+ announce number +  
or  
or  
or  
Play announcement  
Direct extension transfer  
Mailbox transfer  
+ mailbox ext. number +  
or  
Delete Selector Code  
If Finished (exit without changing  
selector code)  
To accept current selector code  
action  
If you want to modify another selector Code  
action, return to the beginning of Step 9  
To save menu changes go to Step 10 (Required)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To record a submenu prompt:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
Bilingual mode (go to Step 11)  
Monolingual mode, choose one of the  
following:  
[record prompt]  
Record a new prompt, choose one of  
the following:  
Approve prompt  
Listen to prompt  
Re-record prompt  
Delete recording  
Use the existing submenu prompt  
and save any menu definition  
changes  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To record a submenu prompt (Bilingual mode):  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
11 Choose one of the following:  
Primary Language  
Secondary Language  
Save menu definition and submenu prompt  
12 Record a submenu prompt:  
[record prompt]  
Approve prompt  
Listen to prompt  
Re-record prompt  
Delete recording  
13 Repeat record process for other language. (Go to Step  
11).  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifying a Submenu  
Use this procedure to change a submenu definition or prompt. There can be up to 99 submenus  
shared among four Automated Attendants. A submenu can be assigned to one or more Automated  
Attendants and each submenu can be up to two minutes long. The submenu uses the same Dial  
0/Timeout Action defined for the Day or Night menu.  
To modify a Submenu:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Enter Automated Attendant number  
Select Submenus  
2
3
4
5
[1-4]  
[1-99]  
[1-9]  
Enter submenu number  
6
7
8
Select Modify the Submenu  
Enter Selector Code  
Modify Selector Code. Then choose one of the  
following Selector Code Actions:  
Selector Code transfer  
+ ext. number +  
or _ _  
_
_ _ _  
Play submenu  
_
+ submenu number +  
Play Announcement  
or  
+
_
_
+ announcement. number  
or  
Direct extension transfer  
_
or_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
Mailbox transfer  
_
Delete Selector Code  
+ mailbox ext. number +  
_
or  
If finished modifying this Selector Code  
_ _ _ _ _ _  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9
If finished modifying submenu definition.  
You must continue with either Step 10 or  
Step 11 and follow the instructions to save  
the submenu definition and submenu  
Note:  
prompt.  
10  
If system is in Bilingual mode, go to Step 11. If  
system is in Monolingual mode, choose one of the  
following:  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
[record new prompt]  
or  
Record a new prompt; then after recording,  
press 1 and choose one of the following:  
— Approve  
or  
or  
— Listen to prompt  
— Re-record prompt  
— Delete recording  
Use existing submenu prompt and save  
submenu definition changes. For Monolingual  
mode, procedure is finished.  
11  
12  
If system is in Bilingual mode, choose one of the  
following:  
_
Primary Language  
or  
or  
Secondary Language  
Save submenu definition and submenu prompt  
changes  
Record a new prompt; then after recording, press 1  
and choose one of the following:  
[record new prompt]  
or  
Approve. Return to Step 11(for Secondary  
Language)  
Listen to prompt. Return to Step 11  
or  
or  
Re-record prompt. Return to Step 11  
Delete recording. Return to Step 11 (for  
Secondary Language)  
Deleting a Submenu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting a Submenu  
Use this procedure to delete an Automated Attendant submenu.  
To delete a Submenu:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Enter Automated Attendant number  
Select Submenus  
[1-4]  
Enter submenu number  
[1-99]  
6
7
Delete submenu  
Choose one of the following:  
Confirm  
or  
Cancel  
Deleting Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating Announcements  
Announcements are recorded messages that callers hear when they make specific selections from  
the MERLIN Messaging System menus and/or submenus.  
The MERLIN Messaging System allows up to 99 announcements shared among all  
Automated Attendants.  
The same announcement can be used for any or all menus or submenus and for all  
Automated Attendants.  
A single announcement can be up to two minutes in length.  
The factory setting is "Announcement [nn] does not exist."  
To create an announcement:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select Announcements  
[1-4]  
Enter announcement number  
[1–99]  
6
Choose an option:  
Create an announcement  
Cancel  
Deleting Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To create an announcement:  
Step  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to announcement  
,or if Bilingual  
Modify announcement  
Delete announcement  
Confirm deletion  
Cancel deletion  
If finished  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To listen to an announcement (Bilingual mode):  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
8
Choose one of the following:  
If the system is in Monolingual mode, listen to submenu  
prompt:  
If system is in Bilingual mode:  
Listen to submenu prompt in Primary Language  
Listen to submenu prompt in Secondary Language  
Listen to submenu definition  
If finished  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To modify an announcement:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
9
If system is in Bilingual mode, go to Step 10. If  
system is in Monolingual mode, choose one of the  
following:  
[record announcement]  
Record new announcement; then after  
recording, press  
following:  
and choose one of the  
Approve  
Listen to announcement  
Re-record announcement  
Delete new recording  
Use existing announcement. For  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To record an announcement (Bilingual mode):  
Step  
10  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
Choose one of the following:  
Record Primary Language  
Record Secondary Language  
Use existing announcement recording  
11  
Record the announcement then choose one of the  
following:  
[record announcement ]  
Approve announcement  
Listen to announcement  
Re-record announcement  
Delete new recording  
12  
Repeat announcement recording process for other  
language  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifying an Announcement  
Use this procedure to modify an existing Automated Attendant announcement.  
To modify an Announcement:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Enter Automated Attendant number  
Select Announcements  
2
3
4
5
[1-4]  
Enter announcement number  
[1-99]  
6
7
Select Modify Announcement  
If system is in Bilingual mode, go to Step 8. If system __________ __ __  
is in Monolingual mode, choose one of the following:  
_____  
Record new announcement; then after recording,  
press 1 and choose one of the following:  
[record new prompt]  
— Approve  
or  
or  
or  
— Listen to announcement  
— Re-record announcement  
— Delete recording  
Use existing Announcement. For Monolingual  
mode, procedure is finished.  
8
If system is in Bilingual mode, choose one of the  
following:  
Primary Language  
Secondary Language  
Save any recording changes  
or  
or  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9
Record new announcement; then after recording, press  
[record new prompt]  
or  
Approve. Return to Step 8 (For Secondary  
Language)  
Listen to recording. Return to Step 8  
Re-record recording. Return to Step 8  
or  
or  
Delete recording. Return to Step 8 (For  
Secondary Language)  
Deleting Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting an Announcement  
Use this procedure to delete an Automated Attendant announcement.  
To delete an Announcement:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Enter Automated Attendant number  
Select Announcements.  
[1-4]  
Enter announcement number  
[1-99]  
6
7
Delete announcement  
Choose one of the following:  
Confirm  
or  
Cancel  
Deleting Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming the Schedule Controller  
The Schedule Options define the Day and Night Service operation of the Automated Attendant(s).  
When you program the Schedule Options, you can:  
Administer the Weekly Business Schedule.  
Programming the Schedule Options also allows you to administer the Temporary Schedule.  
This procedure is covered in Path 3: Ongoing Maintenance and Administration,  
"Managing the MERLIN Messaging System."  
Note:  
To program the Schedule Controller  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select Schedule Options  
[1-4]  
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to Schedule Controller and schedule settings  
Administer the Schedule Controller, then choose an option  
Follow Switch Mode  
Follow Weekly Business Schedule  
Follow both the switch mode and the Weekly  
schedule  
Administer Weekly Business Schedule  
If finished programming Schedule Controller  
Administering a Temporary Schedule  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attendant Schedule and Fax Assignment for the information you  
NOTE: need to program the Schedule Controller  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To administer a Weekly Business Schedule:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Choose one of the following:  
Enter day to be administered as follows:  
Sunday  
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
All days  
If finished.  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Open  
Closed  
Return to Step 6 to administer by day  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To administer Weekly Business Schedule:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone  
Input  
8
Enter opening time where:  
[hhmm]  
hh = hour [00–23]  
mm = minute [00–59]  
Enter closing time where:  
hh = hour [00–23]  
9
[hhmm]  
mm = minute [00–59]  
10 Choose one of the following:  
Approve and save. Return to Step 6 to administer another  
day.  
Re-enter. Return to Step 8.  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administering a Temporary Schedule  
The Temporary Schedule overrides both the Switch mode and the Weekly Business Schedule. For  
each day with a temporary opening or temporary closing schedule, you specify the start and end  
time of the special schedule. During other periods of that day, the Automated Attendant operates  
in the appropriate mode based on its Schedule Controller setting.  
For a temporary opening schedule, the regular Day menu prompt plays. For a temporary closing  
schedule, you may record a temporary closure greeting that plays before the regular Night menu  
prompt or specify that only the regular Night menu prompt be played. Only one temporary  
closure greeting can be recorded for each Automated Attendant. If you set the system for  
temporary closings on more than one day and choose to use the temporary closure greeting, the  
same greeting will be used for each day. If you want a different greeting for each day, you must  
record a new greeting for the correct day. If the system is in Bilingual mode, the temporary  
closure greeting must include recordings in both languages.  
The Temporary Schedule can be programmed for the current day and/or the following six days. It  
also can be cancelled anytime before or while the Temporary Schedule is in effect. The  
Temporary Schedule does not carry over from week to week; it expires at the end of the day for  
which you created it.  
To set the Temporary Schedule for the entire day, enter 0000 as the start time and 2359 as  
the end time.  
Note:  
To administer a Temporary Schedule:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Enter Automated Attendant number  
Select Schedule Options  
2
3
4
5
[1-4]  
Choose one of the following:  
Step 6.  
If finished  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
Choose one of the following:  
Enter day to be administered as follows:  
— Sunday  
or  
or  
— Monday  
— Tuesday  
— Wednesday  
— Thursday  
— Friday  
or  
or  
or  
or  
or  
— Saturday  
— All days  
If finished  
7
Choose one of the following:  
Open  
or  
or  
Closed  
Delete temporary opening or closing for the  
day  
or  
If finished  
8
9
Enter starting time for Temporary Schedule where:  
hh = hour [00-23]  
mm = minute [00-59]  
[hhmm]  
[hhmm]  
Enter ending time for Temporary Schedule where:  
hh = hour [00-23]  
mm = minute [00-59]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10  
Choose one of the following:  
procedure is complete. Return to Step 6 to  
administer a Temporary Schedule for another  
day. For a temporary closing schedule, go to  
Step 11.  
or  
Re-enter. Return to Step 8.  
11  
12  
If this is a temporary closing schedule, choose one of  
the following:  
prompt. Return to Step 6 to administer a  
Temporary Schedule for another day.  
or  
or  
Play a temporary closure greeting before  
regular Night menu prompt.  
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to current temporary closure greeting  
Record new greeting, then after recording,  
press 1 and choose one of the following:  
[record new greeting]  
— Approve  
or  
or  
or  
— Listen to greeting  
— Re-record greeting  
— Delete greeting  
If finished  
Deleting Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Line Assignments  
This procedure only applies to systems that use more than one Automated Attendant. Skip  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 4 – Line Assignments for  
the site-specific information you need to complete the following programming task.  
Note:  
If you want a line to be answered by Automated Attendant 1, no programming is  
needed.  
If you want a line to be answered by Automated Attendant 2, 3 or 4, you must enter  
the line number and identify which Automated Attendant should answer it.  
MERLIN Messaging System allows a maximum of 80 line assignments among all  
Automated Attendants.  
The procedure for deleting lines is covered Path 3: Ongoing Maintenance and  
Administration, "Managing the MERLIN Messaging System."  
To program Line Assignments:  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select Line Assignments  
[1-4]  
Choose one of the following:  
Review Line assignment  
Add a line to Automated Attendantthen  
Re–enter line number  
[nnn]  
6
7
Repeat Step 5 for each line you want to add to this  
Automated Attendant  
If finished with Line Assignment programming  
Deleting an Announcement  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Assigning a Fax Extension to an Automated Attendant  
extension. Next you must use this procedure to assign a Fax extension to one or more Automated  
Attendants.  
Schedule and Fax Assignment for the site-specific information you need to  
Note:  
complete the following programming task.  
MERLIN Messaging allows a maximum of one fax extension per Automated  
Attendant.  
Multiple Automated Attendants can share the same fax extension.  
The procedure for removing a fax extension is covered in Path 3: Ongoing  
Maintenance and Administration, "Managing the MERLIN Messaging  
System."  
To program a Fax Extension:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed.  
Select Automated Attendant  
Select a specific Automated Attendant  
Select Fax Extension  
[1-4]  
Enter an extension number  
[nnnn]  
6
7
Repeat Steps 3 –5 for all fax extensions to be identified  
If finished with fax identification programming  
Deleting Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Assigning a Fax Machine Extension  
You can assign up to four fax extensions, one for each Automated Attendant. If an Automated  
Attendant has been assigned a fax extension, when an incoming fax call is detected by the  
Automated Attendant, it routes the call to the fax machine. You can administer a Directory  
Listing or Recorded Name for a fax extension.  
Refer to MERLIN Messaging System Planning Form 2 – Extension Administration for the  
fax Assignment information identified for your site.  
To assign a fax machine to an extension:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension number  
[nnn]  
Assign a fax machine to the extension  
Choose one of the following:  
Program Directory Listing or Recorded Name  
Delete this extension  
If this fax extension is assigned to an  
Automated Attendant you must do one  
of the following:  
Note:  
Confirm  
Cancel  
If finished  
Modifying an Announcement  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To program Directory Listing or Recorded Name (optional procedure):  
Step Programming Task  
Optional Steps  
Touch-Tone Input  
6
Select Record Name  
Choose one of the following:  
Listen to name  
If finished  
[record name]  
or  
Record name; then after recording, press  
and choose  
one of the following:  
Approve Name  
or  
or  
Play back recorded name  
Re-record name  
Delete name just recorded  
If finished recording a name  
7
Select Directory Listing  
Administer Directory Listing, then choose one of the following:  
For Release 2 and later, enter up to first ten letters of  
name, using Touch-Tones. In Release 1 or 1.1, enter up to  
first 4 letters of name.  
[nn nn nn nn]  
Approve  
Re-enter  
Exit without changes  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Fax Extensions  
Use the following procedure to delete a Fax Extension.  
To delete a Fax Extension:  
Step Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select Extension Administration  
Enter extension  
[nnn]  
4
5
Delete this extension  
If this extension is not assigned to an Automated Attendant, go  
to step 6.  
Choose one of the following:  
Confirm  
Cancel  
6
If finished  
Assigning Fax Extensions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Logging in to System Administration  
described in Initially Logging in to System Administration.  
Logging in to System Administration  
Step  
Programming Task  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
Dial extension number of MERLIN Messaging System [nnn]  
Calling Group.  
2
Enter System Administration extension number.  
3
4
Enter password.  
[nnnnnn]  
Select System Administration.  
This option is not heard on the System  
Administration activity menu. The menu item is  
deliberately hidden to minimize your system's  
Note:  
vulnerability to abuse. You should select it even  
though it is not heard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying System Security Parameters  
The MERLIN Messaging System provides the following features to help protect your system  
Transfer Restrictions - When this feature is activated, *8 transfers, Automated  
Attendant direct extension transfers and Personal Operator transfers are restricted to  
extensions that are included in the MERLIN Messaging extension list. The extension list  
includes extensions assigned as Automated Attendant extensions. Mailbox extensions,  
Transfer-Only Extensions, Fax Extensions and the Call Answer Service Operator  
Security Alert - Setting a minimum password length of six digits or greater is highly  
recommended to help discourage hackers. If you choose a setting of less than six digits,  
the system reminds you that a setting of six or more digits makes your system less  
Minimum Password Length -is the minimum number of digits users must enter when  
setting a new password for their mailbox. The factory setting is six digits; this setting  
can be changed to 1-15 digits.  
You can modify two Merlin Messaging System security features (Transfer Restrictions and  
Minimum Password Length). These features are designed to enhance system security and  
Setting Minimum Password Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Transfer Restrictions  
The factory setting for Transfer Restrictions is On. When Transfer Restrictions are set to On,  
transfers (  
transfers, Automated Attendant Direct extension transfers and Personal Operator  
transfers) are restricted to extensions that are contained in the extension list (Automated  
Attendant extensions, Mailbox extensions, Transfer-Only extensions and Fax extensions) and to  
the Call Answer Service Operator extension. This helps to prevent users and callers from  
committing toll fraud by transferring to an outside operator who could place a call for them.  
Transfer Restrictions can be set to Off; however, changing the factory setting to this option is  
strongly discouraged, as it leaves your system vulnerable to toll fraud.  
Setting the Transfer Restrictions to Off leaves your system vulnerable to toll  
fraud. Lucent Technologies strongly recommends that you keep the Transfer  
Restrictions set to On.  
To set Transfer Restrictions:  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed  
Select System Security Parameters  
Select Transfer Restrictions  
Choose one of the following:  
On  
or  
Off  
If finished  
Procedure  
Setting Minimum Password Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Minimum Password Length  
The Minimum Password Length is the minimum number of digits that a user can specify when  
setting a password for his/her mailbox. The Minimum Password Length also applies to the  
System Administration password. The range is 0 – 15 digits.  
The shorter the Minimum Password Length, the more vulnerable the system is  
to abuse by unauthorized persons. Choosing the longest acceptable minimum  
password length maximizes the security of the system. The factory-set  
Minimum Password Length is 6 digits.  
If you attempt to set a minimum length of less than 6 digits, the system will:  
Remind you that at least 6 digits is recommended.  
Note:  
Advise you about system vulnerability.  
To set Minimum Password Length:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
1
2
3
4
Log in to System Administration, if needed.  
Select System Security Parameters  
Select Minimum Password Length  
Choose one of the following:  
Enter Minimum Password Length  
If finished  
[0-15]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Backing Up and Restoring the System  
You can manually back up programmed configuration data and a subset of the Automated  
Restoring the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Backing Up the System to the PC Card  
Following MERLIN Messaging System programming, you can back up programmed  
configuration data and a subset of the Automated Attendant menu submenu and announcement  
prompts onto the PC Card. The backed up information may be used to perform a system restore if  
the system fails or if data becomes corrupted.  
The MERLIN Messaging System must be in an idle state in order for the backup to  
begin.  
Note:  
Prior to starting the backup process, the system will busy-out the messaging ports.  
During the backup process, the system does not answer calls.  
The backup process can take up to 20 minutes.  
To back up the system:  
Step  
Touch-Tone Input  
Log in to System Administration, if needed.  
1
2
3
Select System Backup  
Select Backup, then choose one of the  
following:  
or  
Confirm  
Cancel  
4
If finished  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Restoring the Messaging System  
Requests to have the MERLIN Messaging System perform a restore must be initiated by the  
System Manager and should be originated via the terminal interface. When you request a  
system restore, MERLIN Messaging reads data that was previously stored on the PC Card  
during a successful backup and writes it to the MERLIN Messaging System hard disk.  
The MERLIN Messaging System must be in idle status for the restore  
process to begin. If any voice messaging ports are in use (that is, off hook),  
the restore request will be rejected.  
Note:  
MERLIN Messaging voice messaging services are not available while a  
restore is in progress.  
If the restore process fails, the MERLIN Messaging System logs this as a  
critical event  
Once initiated, the restore process cannot be interrupted by the System  
Manager.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Ongoing Maintenance and Administration  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Managing the MERLIN Messaging System  
Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and Administration  
Appendix B: Sample Configuration Report  
Upgrading MERLIN Messaging System Port Licensing  
MERLIN Messaging System User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
The MERLIN Messaging System provides terminal-based reporting, maintenance and reset  
capabilities to help System Managers and service technicians to:  
Assess the health of the system.  
Identify voice messaging system problems.  
Initiate the appropriate corrective action, when needed.  
Report and maintenance/administration requests are entered via a terminal interface on either a  
local or remote basis. Local access is through connection to the RS-232 serial port on the  
MERLIN Messaging System module. Remote access is via public switched telephone network  
(PSTN) dial-up to the communications system switch and communications system connection  
to the modem port on the messaging module. System access is login and password  
protected.  
User access to the MERLIN Messaging System is supported via an ASCII terminal interface  
available through the serial and Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) ports. PCs connected  
through the terminal interface and running terminal emulation software can capture report  
information and retain it locally in the form of ASCII data files for subsequent review,  
manipulation or management.  
Maintenance and Administration Summary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging System Reports  
The MERLIN Messaging System provides four types of reports:  
Report  
Purpose  
Configuration  
Helps verify that the system configuration  
matches the customer’s requirements  
Critical Event  
Mail Box Report  
Trouble Log  
Assists in quickly identifying system  
malfunctions and appropriate corrective  
action  
Assists in tracking problems associated with  
the recording, storage and retention of voice  
messages  
Assist in auditing and tracking the service  
history for a MERLIN Messaging System  
Related Topic  
Maintenance and Administration Summary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN Messaging System Maintenance and Administration  
MERLIN Messaging System Maintenance and Administration allows users to perform the  
Make an entry in a Trouble History Log.  
Not all capabilities are available to all users. The following section  
describes user access  
and security requirements.  
Related Topics  
Report Summary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Access and Security Requirements  
Two groups of users have report, maintenance and administrative access to the MERLIN  
Messaging System. These users are:  
MERLIN Messaging System Manager  
Service Technicians  
Each user type has a unique login. The password for all user types is the System Manager  
"mailbox" password. The combination of login and password defines the capabilities available to  
that user. The table below describes user-specific report, maintenance and administrative  
capabilities.  
User  
Report Access  
Maintenance/Administration  
System  
Manager  
Configuration Report  
System Reset  
Backup  
Mailbox Report  
Restore  
Change System Administration  
Password  
Service  
Technician  
Configuration Report  
Critical Event Report  
Mailbox Report  
System Reset  
Entry in Trouble History Log  
Retrieve Trouble  
History Log  
Related Topics  
Establishing a Local Session  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Establishing a Remote Session  
You can establish a remote connection via your PC's modem to the MERLIN Messaging  
System via dial-up to the Remote Maintenance Device (RMD), which is a modem located on  
the MERLIN Messaging System's PC Card. The extension number for the RMD is the twelfth  
extension number assigned to the MERLIN Messaging System module. The RMD connection  
supports line speeds up to 14.4 K baud.  
There are several ways you can dial in and connect to the RMD from a remote location:  
Dial into the communications system using a Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk associated with the RMD  
port extension on the MERLIN Messaging System.  
Dial in on an outside line programmed for Remote Access, enter a barrier code if required, then dial the  
extension number for the RMD.  
Dial in on an outside line assigned to the MERLIN Messaging System Automated Attendent then dial  
and the extension number for the RMD.  
Dial in to the communications system and when a person answers, request a  
.
The method you use to connect the specific access mode to be used depends on how the MERLIN Messaging  
System and communications system have been configured. Review this with the Service Consultant to  
determine which method you want to use. Make a note of the extension that has been assigned to the Merlin  
Messaging System's RMD (twelfth extension assigned to the MERLIN Messaging System module.  
The MERLIN Messaging System supports one terminal session at a time. If a session is active via the serial  
port at the time a dial-up connection is being attempted, the MERLIN Messaging System displays the  
following message: "Local session active or port is locked please wait..." This message will continue  
to be displayed at 10 second intervals until the serial port connection is terminated or you disconnect from the  
dialup session. If the serial port connection is terminated while the dial-up connection is attempted, the  
"Welcome to Merlin Messaging" message and the login request prompt displays.  
Follow the procedure recommended by your modem manufacturer to install and  
configure the modem. When the modem is installed, connect a telephone to the  
Note: modem's phone jack and connect a telephone company line to the modem's line jack.  
Next, use a terminal emulation, such as Windows Hyperterminal, to start your remote  
session. If you need to call a person and request a manual transfer, follow the  
directions packaged with your terminal emulation packaged to use a telephone to dial  
the number then make a modem connection.  
Related Topics  
Logging in to Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and Administration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Windows HyperTerminal for a Remote Session  
Windows HyperTerminal is the standard terminal emulator and serial communications program  
provided with the Windows operating system. Use the following procedure to set up a HyperTerminal  
icon that you can use anytime you want to start a remote session.  
Procedure  
Step  
1
Procedure  
Click the Start button  
2
Point to Programs, point to Accessories and then click HyperTerminal  
Double-click Hypertrm  
3
HyperTerminal starts in the New Connection mode. For information  
about how to use HyperTerminal, click the Help menu in  
Note: HyperTerminal.  
4
5
On the New Connection window, type a name that describes the connection (for  
example, MERLIN Messaging System), then click OK  
On the Connect To window, enter the area code and telephone number you will use to  
call into the MERLIN Messaging System. Next, select your modem from the Connect  
Using list and click OK  
6
On the Properties window for your modem, set the maximum baud rate to 19200 then  
click OK  
An icon with the name you selected in Step 4 is created. You can then double-click  
this icon to start a remote session with the paramaters you entered  
Related Topics  
Logging in to Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and Administration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Establishing a Local Session  
The MERLIN Messaging System has an RS-232 serial port capable of supporting direct  
connection to a terminal device, such as a PC, with a serial port at a line speed of 9.6 kbps. The  
connection is based on an 8-bit word, no parity, no flow control and autobaud capability. An  
RS-232DW8 cable with a maximum length of 25 feet can be used to connect the terminal to the  
module.  
You need to use the adapters specified below:  
MERLIN Messaging Serial Port  
25-foot DW8 Cable  
AT&T 3SSAF adapter  
Male DB2S-to-female DB1S  
PC/Laptop COM Port  
The MERLIN Messaging System supports one terminal session at a time. If a session is in effect  
through the Remote Maintenance Device (RMD) at the time the serial connection is being  
established, the MERLIN Messaging System ignores all input from the serial connection.  
When the hardware has been connected you must use a terminal emulator (such as Windows  
Hyperterminal) to start your terminal session.  
Establishing a Remote Session  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Logging in to Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and  
Administration  
Before you log in, you must connect your PC to the MERLIN Messaging System module. The following  
Establishing a Remote Session  
After you configure your terminal emulator for a local or remote session, start the program and connnect  
to the MERLIN Messaging System. Once your PC is connected to the MERLIN Messaging System and  
you have a login prompt, use the following procedure to log in to MERLIN Messaging System  
Administration.  
Step  
Action  
Remote Access  
Local Access  
1
Access MERLIN Messaging System  
Dial in to MERLIN  
Messaging System  
Connect RS-232 cable  
to RS-232 serial port  
2
3
A Welcome to Merlin Messaging  
message  
Enter login  
[nnnnnn]  
[nnnnnn]  
[nnnnnn]  
[nnnnnn]  
If you do not enter your login  
within 30 seconds, MERLIN  
Messaging terminates the  
Note:  
session.  
4
Enter the System Administration  
password  
If you do not enter your login  
within 30 seconds, MERLIN  
Messaging terminates the  
Note:  
session.  
System Validation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Validation  
The MERLIN Messaging System validates your login and password entries to determine if you are authorized  
to use the system.  
If  
Then  
Your login and password are  
valid  
The MERLIN Messaging System displays the following:  
"Login successful... one moment please..."  
"This system is restricted to authorized users for legitimate  
business purposes. Unauthorized access or modification of this  
system or the data contained therein is a violation of the law"  
A menu of the options available to you based on your user type  
including a command prompt, "Enter an Option Number:"  
Your login and password entries The MERLIN Messaging System displays the message "Invalid login" and  
are not valid  
requests that you enter a new login and password.  
The MERLIN Messaging System allows up to five consecutive entries of invalid  
login/password after which it displays the message "Session terminated, Port is locked."  
Note: Further login attempts are locked-out for five (5) minutes. The locked-out interval applies  
to access via a modem or local access via direct connection to the serial port.  
Service Technician Options Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Manager Options Menu Screen  
The screen facsimile below contains a menu of options available to the System Manager.  
Click an option name to link to a detailed description of the applicable report or procedure.  
When you request a System Configuration Report or Mailbox Report, the MERLIN Messaging  
System streams the data to the terminal in a manner similar to the way text is sent to a printer.  
Flow control to pause/resume the report stream is not provided. The recommended procedure  
for viewing the report data is to:  
Capture the report to a file or send the report to the printer using terminal emulation  
software (see procedure below).  
After capturing the report to a file, use a visual text editor such as Word Pad to open the  
file and to control scrolling and the display of the report data on the screen, or print the  
report.  
Procedure  
Capturing a Report to a File or Printer Using Hyperterminal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration Report  
The System Configuration Report contains a summary of the configuration information  
administered for the MERLIN Messaging System at the system, Automated Attendant Main  
Extension Information  
Click below to:  
Return to the Service Technician’s Option Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MERLIN MESSAGING Release 1.1.0.16 10:05 23-Mar-99  
CONFIGURATION REPORT  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
System Language Mode: Bilingual  
System/Primary Language: U.S. English  
Secondary Language: French  
System Administration Prompt Language: U.S. English  
Minimum Password Length: 6  
Number of Licensed Ports: 4  
Extensions (Number of)  
Mailboxes: 30  
Transfer Only: 20  
Automated Attendant: 4  
Fax: 4  
Maximum Extension Length: 4  
Call Answer Service Operator Extension: 768  
Transfer Restrictions: ON  
=============================================================================  
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT INFORMATION  
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT 1  
Lines assigned: 803,805,807,809  
Fax Extension: 235  
General Mailbox Owner: 134  
Schedule Controller: Follow Both  
Current Mode: Open  
Business Schedule:  
Day Service Mode Start  
Sun Closed  
End  
Mon Open  
Tue Open  
Wed Open  
07:00  
07:00  
07:00  
18:00  
18:00  
18:00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Thu Open  
Fri Open  
Sat Closed  
07:00  
07:00  
18:00  
18:00  
Temporary Schedule:  
Day  
Mon  
Tue  
Service Mode  
Closed  
Start  
End  
07:00  
07:00  
18:00  
18:00  
Closed + Temp  
Gtg  
Sat  
Open  
09:00  
15:00  
Temp Gtg Recorded: System/Primary Language: YES Secondary Language: NO  
Day Main menu Definition  
Prompt Recorded: System/Primary Language: YES Secondary Language: NO  
CODE  
SELECTOR CODE ACTION EXT  
SUBM/ANNC  
#
# OF  
DIGITS  
1
2
3
4
Direct Ext Transfer  
Play Announcement  
Direct Ext Transfer  
1
3
Collected Digits  
Transfer  
21  
23  
2
5
6
7
Play Submenu  
2
2
Play Announcement  
Selector Code  
Transfer  
8
9
Direct Ext Transfer  
Mailbox Transfer  
Transfer To Ext  
10  
40  
Dial 0/  
Timeout  
Night Main menu Definition  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Prompt Recorded:System/Primary Language: YES Secondary Language: NO  
CODE  
SELECTOR CODE ACTION  
EXT  
SUBM/  
# OF  
ANNC #  
DIGITS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Play Announcement  
Play Announcement  
Play Announcement  
Play Announcement  
Play Announcement  
Play Announcement  
Mailbox Transfer  
Play Announcement  
Mailbox Transfer  
General Mailbox  
5
5
5
5
5
2
28  
5
10  
Dial 0/  
Timeout  
9991  
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT 2  
Lines Assigned: 802,804,806,808  
Fax Extension: 237  
General Mailbox Owner: 134  
Schedule Controller: Follow Switch  
Current Mode: Temporary Night  
Business Schedule: None  
Temporary Schedule:  
Day  
Mon  
Tue  
Service Mode  
Closed  
Start  
07:00  
07:00  
End  
18:00  
18:00  
Closed + Temp  
Gtg  
Sat  
Open  
09:00  
15:00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Temp Gtg Recorded: System/Primary Language: YES Secondary Language: NO  
Day Main menu Definition  
Prompt Recorded: System/Primary Language: YES Secondary Language: NO  
CODE  
SELECTOR CODE ACTION  
EXT  
SUBM/  
# OF  
DIGITS  
ANNC #  
1
2
Direct Ext Transfer  
Play Announcement  
1
3
4
5
Collected Digits Transfer 15  
Collected Digits Transfer 21  
Play Submenu  
4
3
3
2
2
6
7
8
9
Play Announcement  
12  
Selector Code Transfer  
Not Used  
23  
Not Used  
Dial 0/  
Timeout  
Disconnect  
Night Menu Definition  
Prompt Recorded: System/Primary Language: YES Secondary Language: NO  
CODE  
SELECTOR CODE ACTION  
SUBM/  
# OF  
EXT  
ANNC #  
DIGITS  
1
2
3
4
5
Play Announcement  
Play Announcement  
Play Announcement  
Play Announcement  
Play Announcement  
5
5
5
5
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
7
8
9
Play Announcement  
Mailbox Transfer  
Play Announcement  
Mailbox Transfer  
General Mailbox  
2
5
28  
10  
Dial 0/  
Timeout  
--------------------------------------------------------------  
SUBMENU INFORMATION  
SUBMENU 1  
Prompt Recorded: Primary/System Language: YES Secondary Language: NO  
CODE  
SELECTOR CODE ACTION  
EXT  
SUBM/  
# OF  
DIGITS  
ANNC #  
1
2
3
Direct Ext Transfer  
Play Announcement  
Direct Ext Transfer  
1
4
5
Collected Digits Transfer 21  
Play Submenu  
3
2
2
6
7
8
9
Play Announcement  
2
Selector Code Transfer  
Direct Extension Transfer  
Mailbox Transfer  
23  
10  
SUBMENU 2  
Prompt Recorded: Primary/System Language: YES Secondary Language: NO  
CODE  
SELECTOR CODE ACTION  
EXT  
SUBM/  
# OF  
DIGITS  
ANNC #  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
2
3
Direct Ext Transfer  
Play Announcement  
Direct Ext Transfer  
5
4
5
Collected Digits Transfer 21  
Play Submenu  
3
5
2
6
7
8
9
Play Announcement  
1
Selector Code Transfer  
Direct Extension Transfer  
Mailbox Transfer  
23  
10  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
SubMenu Summary (SubMenu Numbers)  
Used but not created: 3,5  
Created but not used: 1  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
ANNOUNCEMENT INFORMATION  
Annc  
Recorded In  
Recorded In  
Number  
System/Primary Language  
Secondary language  
1
2
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
4
Yes  
No  
7
8
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
12  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Announcement Summary (Announcement Numbers)  
Used but not created: 3,5  
Created but not used: 4,7,8  
=============================================================================  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTENSION INFORMATION  
Extension 121  
Type: Mailbox Extension  
Directory Listing: SMIT  
Phone Status: Phone  
Maximum Message Length (min): 4  
Mailbox Size (min): 60  
Mailbox Language: U.S. English  
Personal Operator Extension:  
Call Answer Mode: Record  
Personal Greetings Recorded: 1,3  
Active Greeting: System  
Personal Group List 1: 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27  
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51  
52 53 54 55 56  
Outcall Privilege Enabled: Yes  
Outcalling Turned On: Yes  
Outcalling Schedule: 08:00 - 17:00 Delay: 15 min Cycles: 5  
Outcall List 1: Pager 9*18005551212****1232456#18005551234#  
Outcall List 2: Phone 9*9577777  
Outcall List 3: Phone 9*18003334444  
Outcall List 4: Phone 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234  
5678901234567890  
Outcall List 5: Phone 9*18005551255  
Extension 123  
Type: Fax Extension  
Directory Listing:  
Phone Status: Phone  
Extension 124  
Type: Transfer Only  
Directory Listing:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Phone Status: Phone  
Extension 129  
Type: Automated Attendant 1  
Directory Listing:  
Phone Status: No Phone  
Extension 9991  
Type: Mailbox Extension  
Directory Listing:  
Phone Status: No Phone  
Max Message Length (min): 5  
Mailbox Size (min): 60  
Mailbox Language: U.S. English  
Personal Operator Extension:  
Call Answer Mode: Record  
Personal Greetings Recorded:  
Active Greeting: System  
Outcall Privilege Enabled: No  
Personal Group List :  
Outcalling Schedule: Delay: Cycles:  
Outcall List 1:  
MERLIN MESSAGING Release 1.1.0.16 10:05 23-Mar-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
The screen facsimile below contains a menu of options available to a Service Technician. Click each of the options to link to a  
detailed description of the applicable report or procedure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Change Daily System Maintenance Time  
The MERLIN Messaging System is factory set to restart itself each day at 3:00 am. This  
Scheduled System Restart is designed to allow the MERLIN Messaging System to perform  
system and diagnostic checks to ensure system and data integrity. The Scheduled System  
Restart eliminates the need for you to manually perform several diagnostic audits and ensures  
that MERLIN Messaging System diagnostics are performed on a regular basis.  
The MERLIN Messaging System keeps a time record of the last Scheduled or Manual System  
Restart. If the last system restart occurred within the last 23 hours, the MERLIN Messaging  
System cancels Scheduled System Restart.  
A Scheduled System Restart is initiated only if the MERLIN Messaging System is idle, i.e., all  
of the voice messaging ports are "on hook." If any voice messaging ports are busy, the system  
cancels the Scheduled System Restart then checks for an idle status every 5 minutes for a one  
hour period. If the MERLIN Messaging System is not idle during this one hour period, the  
Scheduled System Restart is cancelled until the next day at the scheduled time.  
While a System Restart is in progress, all voice messaging ports are busied out and all event  
data is written to the Event Log before the MERLIN Messaging System shuts down. When the  
System Restart is complete, the MERLIN Messaging System refreshes the Message-Waiting  
lights and logs the voice messaging ports into the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group  
so that the MERLIN Messaging System can respond to calls.  
You can use the Change Daily System Maintenance Time option to do the following:  
Turn off the Scheduled System Restart (not recommended)  
Change the Scheduled System Restart time  
Procedure  
Changing the Daily System Maintenance Time  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing The Date and Maintenance Time  
To change the daily system maintenance time:  
Step  
1
Programming Task  
PC Input  
From the Menu Options Screen, select Change Daily  
System Maintenance Time  
2
From the Change Daily System Maintenance Time  
submenu, choose one of the following:  
To cancel the Scheduled System Restart, choose  
Turn Off Daily Maintenance (not recommended)  
To change the time for the Scheduled System  
Restart, choose Change Daily System Maintenance  
Time and enter the new time in the 24 hour format  
(hhmm) or press Enter to keep the currently  
programmed time  
[xxxx]  
or  
3
Return to the Service Technician Options screen  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Critical Event Report  
The MERLIN Messaging System tracks the activities that it performs, recording events as  
entries in a daily log. Information is captured 7 days a week, 24 hours a day basis. The report  
contains a list of errors that indicate a system failure to assist Service Personnel in determining  
whether the system must be replaced.  
Ther are no field-replaceable components in the MERLIN  
Messaging System.  
Note:  
The Critical Event Report, is accessible via the Service Technician option menu, but cannot be  
accessed via the System Manager Option menu.  
The Critical Event Report:  
Presents a summary of the critical error conditions the system has encountered over a  
seven-day period, which is the length of time the log data is retained.  
Lists all event instances on a first-in/first out basis, starting with the oldest day and  
progressing to the current date and time.  
Provides the following summary items:  
Software System Release and version number.  
System Date and time when the report is generated.  
The range of dates for which the report is valid.  
The message "No Critical Events Logged", if no error events were found.  
Includes the following "Error" types, including the date and time when they occurred  
(consult with the TSO to determine the action to be taken for each type):  
Forced System Reset  
Announcement Lost  
DSP Insane  
Bad Mailbox Data  
No Mailbox RAM  
No Voice Msg Space  
Message Send Fail  
Locked Port  
No Message Queue  
Voice Announce Corrupt  
Automated Attendant Announcement Corrupt  
Real Time Clock Failed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mailbox Report  
The MERLIN Messaging Mailbox Report allows you to access and view the current status of  
messages in user mailboxes. This allows you to handle message delivery and timeline issues.  
For a specified mailbox, the Mailbox Report contains the following information:  
The System date and time that the report was generated  
The Mailbox Number  
The number of messages in the Mailbox  
For each message:  
The date and time it was recorded  
Duration  
Whether it is new (unplayed) or old (played)  
Click here to view a sample Mailbox Report  
Procedure  
Requesting a Mailbox Report  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mailbox Report  
MERLIN MESSAGING Release 1.1.0.16 10:15 23-Mar-99  
===================== Mailbox Report =====================  
This report lists the number of messages, their duration and the time they were  
recorded in the mailbox.  
===================== Mailbox Report =====================  
Number  
of  
Messages:  
4
Mess.  
No.  
Recorded  
Date ___ Time  
Length  
(Sec)  
Type  
(New or Old)  
========== =================== ============== ============  
1
2
3
4
23-Mar ___ 09:53  
23-Mar ___ 10:00  
23-Mar ___ 10:11  
23-Mar ___ 10:14  
200  
3000  
12  
Old  
Old  
New  
New  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Requesting a Mailbox Report:  
To request a mailbox report, do the following:  
Step Programming Task  
PC Input  
1 From the Options Menu screen, select  
Mailbox Report  
2 From the Select Mailbox Submenu,  
enter the extension for the applicable  
mailbox  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
If the extension you enter does  
not have a mailbox, the MERLIN  
Note: Messaging System will display  
the message "Extension not  
valid." Do one of the following:  
Enter a new extension  
Return to Options Menu screen  
3 After the report data is displayed,  
choose one of the following:  
[nnnn]  
Enter a new extension  
Return to Options screen  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enter Notes in Permanent Trouble Log  
Creation of an entry in the Permanent Trouble Log assists Service Technicians in tracking  
troubles and resolutions associated with a MERLIN Messaging System. Service Technicians  
are encouraged to leave a short description of the problem and resolution at the time a system  
is serviced to make future effort more productive, should they or their colleagues have to again  
service that system. Service Technicians can acess the Permanent Trouble Log Entry Submenu  
by entering 6 and pressing the return key at the Enter Option Number prompt. After selecting  
this option, a log entry prompt is displayed by the system. A Service Technician can cancel  
(i.e., back–out) making an entry an "n" and a carriage return. If an "n" is entered, the system  
returns to display the Service Technician's Options Menu.  
If the Service Technician enters a "y", the system provides separate prompts to enter their  
name, contact information and a short text description of the problem and its resolution. The  
Service Technician can end their input to each prompt by entering a double carriage return. A  
current line editing capability (i.e., backspacing) is available to modify your typed input until a  
carriage return is typed, at which time the information becomes un-editable. Following  
completion of the problem description/resolution entry, the MERLIN Messaging System  
automatically dates and time stamps the entry in the log, indicates that an entry has been in the  
log and returns to displaying the Service Technician's Options Menu.  
Procedure  
Entering Notes in the Permanent Trouble Log  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Notes in the Permanent Trouble Log  
Step  
Programming Task  
PC Input  
1 Access the Permanent Trouble Log  
Entry Submenu.  
After selecting this option, a log  
entry prompt is displayed by the  
system  
2 Choose to continue or "back out" of Y or  
the menu.  
N
3 Enter information and end their  
input to each prompt by entering a  
double carriage return.  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display Permanent Trouble Log  
The Permanent Trouble Log Report contains a history of the information entered by Service  
Technicians or TSO personnel who have previously serviced the MERLIN Messaging System.  
MERLIN Messaging System servicing practices include the generation of entries in the  
Trouble Log regarding any findings/actions after servicing a system.  
Access to this history can assist Service Technicians in quickly focusing on prior conditions  
that may be a source for current problems.  
The Permanent Trouble Log Report provides the following information regarding each service  
instance that has been entered in the log:  
Date the log entry was made  
Date and time of service  
Name and affiliation of the technician making the entry  
Trouble description and resolution  
Procedure  
Displaying the permanent Trouble Log  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the Permanent Trouble Log  
Step  
PC Input  
Programming Task  
1 View all entries the Permanent Trouble  
Log  
Click below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MERLIN MESSAGING Release 1.1 10:15 23-Mar-99  
===================== Permanent Trouble Log Report ===========================  
This report shows the service history information for this unit that has been entered by service  
personnel regarding problems and their resolutions.  
=========================================================================  
Date and Time of Log Entry: 15-Jan-99 10:30  
Date and Time of Service: January 15, 1999 at 10:00 AM +/- 5 min  
Name: John Smith  
Contact Information: ABC Telecom Systems  
Description/Resolution: System would not boot successfully with PC Card in place. Replaced PC Card  
and System boots OK.  
===================================================================  
Date and Time of Log Entry: 25-Feb-99 10:30  
Date and Time of Service: 2/26/99 at 9:00 AM  
Name: Tom Lewis  
Contact Information: ABC Telecom Systems  
Description/Resolution: Customer says messages are not being written to mailbox. Checked  
configuration and changed Call Answer Mode to record from answer only mode.  
===================================================================  
Date and Time of Log Entry: 03-Mar-99 16:30  
Date and Time of Service: 3/3/99 2:30 PM  
Name: Tom Lewis  
Contact Information: ABC Telecom Systems  
Description/Resolution: Customer says some messages recorded in mailboxes are garbled. Made  
several test calls and checked the messages. Confirmed that 3 of the 5 messages recorded were  
garbled. Ran Critical Event report. Found no problems. Reset the system - did not clear problem.  
Referred problem to NSAC for further analysis.  
MERLIN MESSAGING Release 1.1.0.16 10:15 23-Mar-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Restart Messaging System  
If you choose this option to restart (that is, reboot) the MERLIN Messaging System, the  
current terminal session is dropped and cannot be re-established until the system has rebooted  
itself. You must re-establish a remote or local terminal session to perform subsequent  
functions.  
Procedure  
Restarting the MERLIN Messaging System  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Restarting the MERLIN Messaging System  
To Restart the MERLIN Messaging System, do the:  
Step Programming Task  
PC Input  
1 From the System Manager Options  
screen, request Restart Messaging  
System  
MERLIN Messaging displays a  
warning message indicating that the  
system will be out-of-service and that  
all active calls including the terminal  
session will be dropped. the MERLIN  
Messaging System prompts requesting  
that you to confirm your restart request  
2 Choose one of the following:  
No (return to System Manager  
N or  
Y
Options screen)  
Yes (initiate restart)  
A Yes (Y) response will result  
in the disconnection of the  
Note: terminal session  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Log Off and Exit  
To log off and exit the MERLIN Messaging System:  
Step  
1
Programming Task  
PC Input  
From the Options screen, select  
Log Off and Exit  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Backup Messaging System  
Only the System Manager can request a backup via the terminal interface. System  
configuration information and selected Automated Attendant Menus and Submenus are  
backed-up onto the Port PC Card that is plugged into the front face of the MERLIN Messaging  
System module.  
MERLIN Messaging System voice messaging services are not available  
while a backup is in progress.  
The backup process can only be started when the MERLIN Messaging  
Note:  
System is in an idle status, i.e., all its voice messaging ports are "on hook."  
See what information is backed up.  
Procedure  
Backing up the Messaging System  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Backing Up the Messaging System  
The MERLIN Messaging System displays the message, "PC Card is absent" if there is no Port  
PC Card in the PCMCIA slot or, "PC Card invalid" if the Port PC Card is not recognized as a  
valid PC Card. In both of these instances, the MERLIN Messaging System aborts the Backup  
and returns to the System Manager's Options Menu. If a valid PC Card is in place and all voice  
messaging ports are idle, the MERLIN Messaging System busies out the voice ports, displays  
the message "Please wait…..the system is being backed-up" and initiates the back-up process.  
To back up the MERLIN Messaging System, do the following:  
Step Programming Task  
PC Input  
1 From the System Manager Options  
screen, request Backup Messaging  
System  
If any ports are in use, the  
back-up request is automatically  
Note: cancelled and you are requested  
to try again later.  
2 Confirm the backup request  
Y
3 Review the backup results, then return to  
the System Manager's Options Menu  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Restore the Messaging System  
Requests to have the MERLIN Messaging System perform a restore must be initiated by the  
System Manager and can be originated via the terminal interface. When you request a system  
restore, MERLIN Messaging reads data that was previously stored on the PC Card during a  
successful backup, and writes it to the MERLIN Messaging System hard disk.  
The MERLIN Messaging System must be in idle status for the restore  
process to begin. If any voice messaging ports are in use (that is, off hook),  
the restore request is rejected.  
MERLIN Messaging voice messaging services are not available while a  
restore is in progress.  
If the restore process fails, the MERLIN Messaging System logs this as a  
critical event  
Note:  
Once initiated, the restore process cannot be interrupted by the System  
Manager.  
The system automatically restarts following a successful restore. The current  
terminal session is dropped and cannot be reestablished until the system has  
rebooted itself. You must re–established a remote or local terminal session  
to perform subsequent functions.  
Procedure  
Requesting a System Restore via the Terminal Interface  
Click Below to:  
Return to the System Manager Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Request a System Restore  
To request a System Restore via the Terminal Interface , do the following:  
Step Programming Task  
PC Input  
1 From the System Manager Options  
screen, request Restore Messaging  
System  
If any voice messaging  
ports are in use at the time  
Note:  
a restore request is made,  
the MERLIN Messaging  
System provides an  
announcement or message  
that the restore request is  
rejected because ports are  
in use.  
If there is no PC Card in  
the PCMCIA slot, the  
MERLIN Messaging  
System responds with an  
error message.  
If the backup version is  
invalid, the MERLIN  
Messaging System  
provides an  
announcement or message  
to the user and rejects the  
restore process  
2 If the PC Card backup data is valid, the  
MERLIN Messaging System announces  
the date and time of the backup and  
prompts you to indicate if you what to  
continue.  
Choose one of the following:  
N or  
Y
No (return to System Manager  
Options screen)  
Yes (initiate restore)  
3 Following system restore, return to the  
System Manager Options screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the restore process is complete, the MERLIN Messaging System displays one of the  
following messages (depending on the outcome of the backup process).  
Restore completed, followed by press enter to return to the menu  
Restore Unsuccessful, Reason and list any errors that occurred during the restore  
process, followed by press enter to return to menu screen  
MERLIN Messaging System Display Messages for Unsucessful Restore  
Message  
Condition  
"PC Card is absent"  
There is no PC Card in the PCMCIA slot  
"Cannot perform Restore,  
PC Card could not be read"  
The PC Card cannot be recognized as a valid card  
The data on the card fails integrity and validity checks  
"Cannot perform Restore,  
PC Card does not contain a  
valid backup"  
In each of these cases, the MERLIN Messaging System aborts the restore and returns to  
displaying the System Managers Options Menu.)  
If the backup data on the PC Card is valid, the system displays the time and date of the backup  
and prompts you to confirm the restore request.  
Click Below to:  
Return to the System Manager Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change Password  
Before you change the System Administration Password using the terminal interface,  
please note the following:  
The MERLIN Messaging System checks for site-specific minimum and maximum  
password length and numeric restrictions before accepting a new System Administration  
Password  
Because the same password is used for when you log into System administration by  
using a Touch-Tone telephone, only numerical digits may be used.  
You cannot change your System Administration Password using the terminal interface if  
you are logged in to the MERLIN Messaging System via the Touch-Tone telephone.  
You must log-off from the Touch-Tone telephone first.  
Procedure  
Changing the System Administration Password  
Click Below to:  
Return to the Service Technician Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the System Administration Password  
To change the System Administration Password using the Terminal Interface, do the  
following:  
Step Programming Task  
PC Input  
1 From the System Manager Options  
Menu screen, select Mailbox Report  
2
Enter your new password  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
3 In response to the system prompt,  
re-enter your new password  
If the two entries do not match,  
the system prompts you to try  
again. Repeat Steps 2-3.  
4 Return to System Manager Options  
screen  
Click Below to:  
Return to the System Manager Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Capturing a Report to a File or Printer Using Hyperterminal  
If you are using the Windows Hyperterminal Terminal software, do the following to capture  
report:  
To capture a report to a file:  
Step Procedure  
1 .  
2.  
Click Transfer on the Hyperterminal menu.  
On the Transfer menu, click Capture Text.  
3.  
Type the path and a name that describes the file the text will be saved in.  
To send a report directly to a printer:  
Step Procedure  
1 . Click Transfer on the Hyperterminal menu.  
2.  
On the Transfer menu, click Capture to printer.  
When you end the call, the session text is sent to your default printer.  
Click Below to:  
Return to the System Manager Options Menu Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Windows HyperTerminal for A Local Session  
HyperTerminal is the standard terminal emulator and serial communications program provided with the  
Windows operating system. The following procedure describes how to set up a HyperTerminal icon that you  
can use anytime you want to start a local session.  
Step  
Procedure  
1
2
3
Click the Start button  
Point to Programs, point to Accessories and then click HyperTerminal  
Double-click Hypertrm  
HyperTerminal starts in the New Connection mode. For information  
about how to use HyperTerminal, click the Help menu in  
Note: HyperTerminal.  
4
On the New Connection window, type a name that describes the connection (for example,  
MERLIN Messaging), then click OK.  
5
6
On the Connect To window Connect Using field, select the appropriate COM port  
on your PC used to connect to the MERLIN Messaging System, then click OK.  
On the COM Properties window, select the following values, then click OK.  
Bits per second: 9600  
Data bits: 8  
Parity: None  
Stop bits: 1  
Flow Control: Hardware  
An icon with the name you selected in Step 4 is created. You can then double-click  
this icon to start a local session with the paramaters you entered. After you start the  
local session, the Login prompt is shown on your screen. Enter the appropriate login  
and password to start the session.  
Related Topics  
Logging in to Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and Administration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Ongoing Maintenance and Administration  
Getting Started  
System Overview  
Managing the MERLIN Messaging System  
Terminal-Based Reporting, Maintenance and Administration  
Performing a Power-On Procedure  
MERLIN Messaging System User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Upgrading MERLIN Messaging System Port Licensing  
The information in this section is intended for qualified technicians  
only. To prevent damage to the MERLIN Messaging System, you must  
power down the communications system before installing or removing  
the MERLIN Messaging System module. Do NOT perform a "hot  
swap."  
This section describes procedures for upgrading the MERLIN Messaging System Release 2  
port licensing to any of the supported configurations; that is a 2-port, 4-port, 6-port, 8-port,  
10-port, or 12-port configuration.  
Port licensing can be upgraded without powering off the communications system. The  
communications system remains powered on. The old PC Card is removed and new PC Card is  
installed quickly. The MERLIN Messaging System restarts in the new configuration.  
Performing a Port Licensing Upgrade  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Performing a Port Licensing Upgrade  
Before performing an In-Service upgrade, you must:  
1. Notify the customer that the MERLIN Messaging System will be unavailable for a short period.  
2. Check the status of the voice messaging ports by using the Port Status LED indicators on the  
MERLIN Messaging System module and wait for all ports to be green. This ensures that no calls  
are in progress on the MERLIN Messaging System when the port licensing upgrade begins.  
To perform the In-Service procedure:  
Step Procedure  
Comments  
1
Remove the PC Card from the PCMCIA  
The communications system can remain powered  
slot in the MERLIN Messaging System and on.  
quickly insert the new PC Card  
The new PC Card should be installed in  
the left-most PCMCIA slot.  
Note:  
To insert the PC Card, hold it with the Lucent  
Technologies label facing to the right and slide it  
gently into the PCMCIA slot.  
When inserted properly, the PC Card  
projects about 1-5/8" (4 cm) from the  
Note: module. The edge of the module should be  
approximately aligned with the letter "I" in  
the word "MERLIN" on the label of the  
PC Card.  
2
3
The MERLIN Messaging System starts  
The MERLIN Messaging System module port  
LEDs blink green several times. When the  
Messaging System is successfully restarted, the  
LEDs corresponding to the number of ports in the  
new configuration light steady green. All  
information from the previous configuration is  
restored.  
Program the communications system  
options, as applicable, for the new  
MERLIN Messaging System voice ports  
Programming Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Restriction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning Lines to the Voice Port Used for Outcalling  
If Outcalling is used for the communications system operating in Key mode, you must assign one or more  
outside lines to the MERLIN Messaging ports used for Outcalling (port 2 on a 2-port system, port 4 on a  
4-port system or port 6 on a 6-port system). You must also set the lines to no ring to ensure proper operation.  
To add an outside line to the extension used for Outcalling in Key mode:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
[any key]  
2
3
4
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Select Lines/Trunks  
Lines/Trunks  
Enter the extension number you want [nnn]  
to program  
[nnn]  
Enter  
5
Add the Outcalling line assignments Press line button or console  
by selecting each line button and  
turning on the green  
or  
+
Function key  
Message-Waiting Light  
6
7
Press Exit when you have finished  
adding the Outcalling lines to that  
extension  
Exit/Back  
Return to  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
System Programming menu  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Outcalling Lines to No Ring  
This procedure is required only when the communication system is in the Key mode and is not needed in  
the Hybrid/PBX mode. To ensure proper operation, the outside line assigned to the MERLIN Messaging  
System voice port(s) that are used for Outcalling must be set to No Ring. This procedure is not necessary if  
the communications system is operating in the Hybrid/PBX mode.  
For MERLIN Messaging System Release 2 or later, the voice port(s) used for Outcalling are Port 2 on a  
2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port system, Ports 5 and 6 on a 6-port system, Ports 7 and 8 on an 8-port  
system, Ports 9 and 10 on a 10-port system, or Ports 11 and 12 on a 12-port system. For Release 1 or 1.1,  
the voice port used for Outcalling is Port 2 on a 2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port sytem, or Port 6 on a  
6-port system.  
For MERLIN Messaging System Release 2 or later, the voice port(s) used for Outcalling are Port 2 on a  
2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port system, Ports 5 and 6 on a 6-Port system, Ports 7 and 8 on a 8-port system,  
Ports 9 and 10 on a 10-port system, or Ports 11 and 12 on a 12-port system. For Release 1 or 1.1, the voice  
port used for Outcalling is Port 2 on a 2-port system, Port 4 on a 4-port system, or Port 6 on a 6-port  
system.  
To Set the Outcalling Line to No Ring:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
Display next page of menu  
/
Cntr-Prg  
Select Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Program Ext  
4
5
Select Program Extension  
Enter the extension you want to  
program  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Start  
6
7
Start Centralized Telephone  
Programming  
Select the line/feature button  
representing the Outcalling line  
Press button on console  
or  
+
function key, then  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Select Ring Options for all lines  
or  
or  
ListFeature  
/
/
/
Ring Options  
All Lines  
Enter  
No Ring  
Enter  
Sys Program  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
9
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enabling Rotary Signaling  
In order for the MERLIN Messaging System to be able to transfer calls, turn the Message-Waiting light On  
and Off and perform Outcalling, all MERLIN Messaging voice ports must be programmed as rotary  
enabled.  
To enable rotary signaling:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
[any key]  
2
3
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Display third page of menu  
/
/
4
5
Select Rotary Enable  
RotaryEnabl  
Enter the extension number of the [nnn]  
MERLIN Messaging System  
voice port  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
7
Repeat Step 5 for all voice ports  
Make sure all MERLIN  
Messaging System voice ports are  
rotary enabled.  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
8
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating a MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group  
You must create a MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group and assign the group members (MERLIN  
Messaging ports).  
To create a Calling Group and assign Group Members:  
Step Programming Task  
Console Input Selection  
PC Input Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
[any key]  
2
3
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Display next menu page  
/
4
5
6
Select Group Calling  
Select Members  
Grp Calling  
Members  
Enter the extension of the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
Enter  
7
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnnn]  
Enter  
8
9
Repeat Step 7 for all active MERLIN  
Messaging System voice ports  
Confirm that all members are entered  
in the correct order  
10  
11  
12  
Return to the Group Calling menu  
Select Hunt Type  
Exit/Back  
Hunt Type  
Enter the extension of the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnnn]  
[nnnn]  
Enter  
13  
Specify Linear Hunt Group  
Linear  
Enter/Back  
14  
Display next menu page  
Select Group Type  
/
15  
16  
Group Type  
Enter the extension of the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
17  
Select Integrated VMI  
Integ VMI  
Enter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing Calling Restrictions to Allow Outcalling  
If  
Then  
The Outcalling feature is not used  
The communications system extensions assigned to MERLIN  
Messaging System module voice ports should be Outward  
Restricted.  
The Outcalling feature is used  
For Release 2 or later, Program the apppropriate ARS FRL for each  
messaging port extension as follows:  
Port 2 only on a 2-port system  
Port 4 only on a 4-port system  
Ports 5 and 6 only on a 6-port system  
Ports 7 and 8 only on a 8-port system  
Ports 9 and 10 only on a 10-port system  
Ports 11 and 12 only on a 12-port system  
For Release 1 and 1.1, ports to be unrestricted or toll restricted are:  
Port 2 only on a 2-port system  
Port 4 only on a 4-port system  
Port 6 only on a 6-port system  
The factory setting for all the MERLIN Messaging System extensions assigned to  
the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group VMI are Outward Restricted.  
Note:  
Refer to your communications System Planning Form containing Call Restrictions  
and Lists information to identify the Outward Restriction status of extensions at  
your site.  
To Change the Calling Restrictions to Allow Outcalling  
Step To… Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
Extensions  
Restriction  
2
3
4
Select Extensions  
Select Restriction  
Enter the extension number of the [nnn]  
highest MERLIN Messaging  
System port  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Select Unrestricted or Toll Restrict  
as applicable  
Unrestricted  
or  
Toll Restrict  
Enter  
6
7
Choose Enter  
Exit/Back  
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Restriction  
(For Hybrid/PBX mode only)  
As an additional security step, network dialing for all extensions, including messaging port extensions, should be  
processed through ARS using dial access code 9.  
All ports on the communications system that are programmed as VMI ports must be:  
Assigned an FRL of 0  
Outward Restricted  
Assigned Disallowed List 7  
This combination of restrictions is designed to prohibit all Outcalling.  
To prevent toll fraud, ARS FRLs should be established, using:  
FRL 0 for restriction to internal dialing only  
FRL 2 for restriction to local network calling only  
FRL 3 for restriction to domestic long distance  
FRL 4 for international calling  
Each extension should be assigned the appropriate FRL to match its calling requirements.  
If  
Then  
A messaging port extension is not used for  
Outcalling  
It should be assigned to FRL 0 (the factory setting)  
Outcalling will be used for the MERLIN  
Messaging System  
For Release 2 or later, Program the apppropriate ARS FRL for  
each messaging port extension as follows:  
Port 2 only on a 2-port system  
Port 4 only on a 4-port system  
Ports 5 and 6 only on a 6-port system  
Ports 7 and 8 only on a 8-port system  
Ports 9 and 10 only on a 10-port system  
Ports 11 and 12 only on a 12-port system  
For Release 1 and 1.1, ports to be unrestricted or toll restricted  
are:  
Port 2 only on a 2-port system  
Port 4 only on a 4-port system  
Port 6 only on a 6-port system  
Refer to your communications System Planning Form containing Call Restrictions and Lists  
information to identify the appropriate FRLs for system ports and other restrictions.  
Note:  
To program the Automatic Route Selection Restriction:  
Step To Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
2
3
4
5
Select Extensions  
Extensions  
Display next page of menu  
Select Restriction  
/
ARS Restrict  
Enter the extension number of the  
MERLIN Messaging System port  
used for Outcalling  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
6
7
Erase restriction level  
or  
+
or  
Backspace  
Enter restriction level (0-6)  
[n]  
[n]  
Enter  
Exit/Back  
7
Return to System Programming menu  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
The Exclusion List contains extensions that are exempt from Night Service password requirements.  
If  
Then  
You want to allow Outcalling after hours  
Messaging port used for Outcalling on the  
Exclusion List  
Refer to your communications System Planning Form containing Night Service,  
Outward Restriction information to identify the MERLIN Messaging port used for  
Note: Outcalling.  
To Create the Night Service Exclusion List:  
Step To Console Input/Selection  
PC Input/Selection  
1
Enter Programming mode  
[any key]  
Sys Program  
Exit/Start  
NightSrvce  
ExcludeList  
2
3
4
Select Night Service  
Select Exclusion List  
Assign the MERLIN Messaging  
System port used for Outcalling to  
the Exclusion List  
[nnn]  
[nnn]  
Enter  
Exit/Back  
Exit/Back  
5
Return to System Programming  
menu  
Programming Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Restriction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Performing a Power-On Procedure  
Before performing a Power-On procedure to increase the number of MERLIN Messaging System voice ports you must:  
1. Notify the customer that the communications system will be powered off and will not be available for a short  
period.  
2. Be sure that no calls are active on the system.  
Step Procedure  
Comments  
1
Power down the communications system.  
2
Remove the PC Card from the PCMCIA slot in  
the MERLIN Messaging System.  
3
Insert the new PC Card.  
The new PC Card should be installed in the left-most  
PCMCIA slot.  
Note:  
To insert the PC Card, hold it with the Lucent Technologies  
label facing to the right and slide it gently into the PCMCIA  
slot.  
When inserted properly, the PC Card projects about  
1-5/8" (4 cm) from the module The edge of the  
Note: module should be approximately aligned with the  
letter "I" in the word "MERLIN" on the label of the  
PC Card.  
4
5
Power up the communications system.  
The MERLIN Messaging System starts.  
Be sure to power up the carrier containing the processor module  
last.  
The MERLIN Messaging System module port LEDs blink  
green several times. When the Messaging System is  
successfully restarted, the LEDs corresponding to the number of  
ports in the new configuration light steady green. All  
information from the previous configuration is restored.  
6
Program the the communications system  
options, as applicable, for the new MERLIN  
Messaging System voice ports. Including:  
Add the new ports to the MERLIN  
Messaging System Calling Group  
Set Rotary Enable  
Research calling restrictions to the  
previous port(s) used for outcalling  
Unrestrict the new outcalling port  
Creating the Night Service Exclusion List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MERLIN® Messaging System  
User’s Guide  
Getting Started  
Using Group Lists  
Using Outcalling  
Personalizing Your Mailbox  
Your Messages  
585-323-203  
COMCODE 108679655  
Issue 3  
June 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting Started  
1: Choose an option:  
Logging  
In  
If you are at an internal extension, go to Step 2.  
If you are at an external telephone, call in on an Automated  
Attendant Service line, then press  
System Manager for further details.)  
. (See your  
2: Dial the MERLIN Messaging extension,  
, to  
access the Voice Mail system.  
3: Choose an option:  
If you are at your own extension, press  
.
If you are at another telephone, enter your extension  
number, then press  
4: Enter your password, then press  
.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Once you have logged in, you can choose any of the  
following options:  
Options  
Press... To...  
Change your name or personal greeting.  
Change your Personal Operator.  
Change your password.  
Change Call Answer mode.  
Listen to messages.  
Record and send messages.  
Program Group Lists.  
Program Outcalling (if Outcalling  
permission is activated).  
Details for the options listed above are located in this  
User’s Guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalizing Your Mailbox  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
Recording  
2: Press  
3: Press  
to change your name recording or greeting.  
to change your name recording.  
Your  
Name  
4: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
to listen to the current name.  
to record your name.  
5: Record your name, then press  
.
6: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to approve your name.  
to play back your name.  
to re-record your name.  
You can have up to 6 different personal greetings (for Release  
1 or 1.1, you can have up to 3 different personal greetings).  
Activate the personal greeting you want a caller to hear.  
Recording  
or Deleting  
a Personal  
Greeting  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
2: Press to change your name recording or greeting.  
3: Press  
to change your greeting.  
4: Enter the greeting number [1 6].  
5: Choose an option:  
If the system is set for Bilingual mode, press  
to  
record your greeting in the Primary Language, or press  
to record your greeting in the Secondary Language.  
Then go to Step 6.  
If the system is set for Monolingual mode, go to Step 6.  
6: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
to listen to your greeting.  
to record your greeting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
continued...  
Press  
to delete your greeting.  
 
Personalizing Your Mailbox  
7: Record your greeting, then press  
.
Recording  
or Deleting  
a Personal  
Greeting  
8: Choose an option:  
Press to approve your greeting. (For Release 2 or  
later, go to Step 6 of Activating a Personal Greeting.)  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to play back your greeting.  
(continued)  
to re-record your greeting.  
to delete the greeting just recorded.  
9: For Release 2 or later, do one of the following:  
If greeting is not already active, go to Step 6 of  
Activating a Personal Greeting.  
If greeting is currently active, choose one of the  
following:  
Press  
Press  
to keep current activation setting.  
to change, then go to Step 6 of  
Activating a Personal Greeting.  
Activate the personal greeting you want a caller to hear. For  
Release 2 or later, you can activate up to 2 personal greetings.  
For example, you can have 1 greeting for internal calls and 1  
greeting for external calls.  
Activating  
a Personal  
Greeting  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
2: Press to change your name or greeting.  
3: Press to change your greeting.  
4: Press to activate a greeting.  
5: Choose an option:  
Enter the number of the greeting you want to activate.  
Press  
to activate the system default greeting.  
6: Choose an option (Release 2 or later):  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to use this greeting for all calls.  
to use this greeting for internal calls only.  
to use this greeting for external calls only.  
if finished.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Personalizing Your Mailbox  
Your Personal Operator is the person whom you want to handle  
your calls when the caller needs immediate assistance and you are  
not available. In your greeting, be sure to mention that callers can  
Changing  
Your  
Personal  
Operator  
press  
to reach your Personal Operator or the System Operator.  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
2: Press  
to change your Personal Operator.  
3: Choose an option:  
Enter your Personal Operator’s extension, then press  
Press  
.
to delete your Personal Operator.  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
Changing  
Your  
Password  
2: Press  
to change your password.  
3: Enter the new password, then press  
4: Re-enter the new password, then press  
.
.
Call Answer mode determines whether or not the system allows  
callers to leave a message after listening to your personal greeting.  
Choosing  
Call  
Answer  
Mode  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
2: Press  
to change Call Answer mode.  
3: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
for Record mode.  
for Answer-Only mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Messages  
In Release 2 or later, you can assign Priority, Private, and/or Return  
About  
Message  
Categories  
Receipt categories to your messages. New Priority messages are  
heard first when listening to new messages. Private messages can  
not be forwarded. Return Receipt messages notify you when the  
message is listened to by the recipient. You can assign one, two, or  
all three categories to a message.  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
Listening  
to  
Messages  
2: Press  
to get messages.  
3: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
to listen to the message body.  
to skip the message. (The message will  
remain as "new" until you listen to the body.)  
4: After the message plays, choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to delete the message.  
to save (skip) the message.  
to replay the message.  
to replay the header only.  
to respond to the message (see next section).  
1: After the recorded message plays, press  
respond to the recorded message.  
2: Choose an option:  
to  
Responding  
to a Message  
Press  
to reply to the sender. (In order to reply, the  
sender must have a mailbox in the system.)  
Press  
Press  
to forward the recorded message.  
to return the call to an internal sender. (Release  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 or later.)  
continued...  
   
Your Messages  
Responding 3: Record your message, then press  
again.  
to a Message 4: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to approve.  
to play back your comments.  
to re-record your comments.  
(continued)  
to cancel replying or forwarding.  
5: Do one of the following:  
For Release 2 or later, if replying, go to Step 6.  
For Release 1 or 1.1, return to Step 4 of Listening  
to Messages.  
If forwarding, do one of the following:  
Enter the extension of an individual, then press  
.
Press  
and a Group List number, then . Use  
Personal Group Lists 1 10 for all releases. For Release  
2 or later, you can also use System Group Lists 50 59.  
Press  
Press  
to use the directory. (SeeUsing the Directory.)  
to delete the last entry.  
6: Press  
when finished addressing.  
7: For Release 2 or later, choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to make this a private message.  
to make this a priority message.  
to request a return receipt.  
to cancel the category.  
to send the recorded message.  
8: Return to Step 4 of Listening to Messages.  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
Sending  
a Message  
2: Press  
to record a message.  
3: Press  
when finished recording.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
continued...  
 
Your Messages  
4: Choose an option:  
Sending  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to approve the recorded message. (Go to Step 5.)  
to play back the recorded message.  
a Message  
(continued)  
to re-record the recorded message.  
to delete the recorded message and return  
to the Voice Mail activity menu.  
5: Choose an option:  
Enter the extension of an individual, then press  
.
Press  
and a Group List number, then . Use  
Personal Group Lists 1 10 for all releases. For Release  
2 or later, you can also use System Group Lists 50 59.  
Press  
to use the directory. (See Using the  
Directory.)  
Press  
to delete the last entry.  
6: Press  
when finished addressing.  
7: For Release 2 or later, choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to make this a private message.  
to make this a priority message.  
to request a return receipt.  
to cancel the category.  
to send the recorded message.  
You can use the Directory instead of entering an extension while  
sending or forwarding a message, or transferring to a user’s  
extension. Ask your System Manager if users are listed by first  
or last name.  
Using the  
Directory  
1: Press  
to access the directory.  
2: For Release 2 or later, enter up to the first ten letters  
of the name. For Release 1 or 1.1, enter up to the first  
four letters of the name.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Personal Group Lists  
Your Personal Group Lists are sets of up to 50 mailboxes  
within the system that allow you to address a message to a  
group of mailboxes. You can have up to 10 Group Lists.  
Creating  
Personal  
Group  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
Lists  
2: Press  
3: Press  
to select Group Lists.  
to create a list.  
4: Enter the Group List number [1 10], then press  
.
5: Choose an option:  
.
Press  
to use the directory. (See Using the  
Directory.)  
Press  
to delete the last entry.  
6: Press  
when finished.  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
Reviewing  
or  
2: Press  
3: Press  
to select Group Lists.  
to review or modify Group Lists.  
Modifying  
Personal  
Group  
Lists  
4: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to review or modify the list. (Go to Step 5).  
to delete the list.  
to skip to the next list.  
5: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to skip the extension.  
to delete the extension.  
Enter the extension of the mailbox, then press  
.
Press  
to use the directory (see Using the Directory).  
6: Press  
when finished.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Personal Group Lists  
Use this page to keep track of your Personal Group Lists and their members.  
Group List  
Number  
Members (Name and/or Extension)  
1
2
3
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Personal Group Lists  
Use this page to keep track of your Personal Group Lists and their members.  
Group List  
Number  
Members (Name and/or Extension)  
6
7
8
9
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Outcalling  
If you turn on Outcalling, MERLIN Messaging calls  
About  
Outcalling  
the numbers which you have programmed to signal that a new  
message has arrived in your mailbox. In Release 2 or later,  
you can have Outcalling for all calls or just priority calls.  
Check with your System Manager to see if you have Outcalling  
privileges.  
Outcalling continues until one of the following happens:  
During the Outcalling message call, you press  
to  
cancel Outcalling until a new message arrives for you.  
You log in to your mailbox and listen to the message.  
The interval specified in your Outcalling schedule expires.  
MERLIN Messaging has called all numbers in your Outcalling  
list the number of times specified by the Cycles option.  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
Turning  
Outcalling  
On or Off  
2: Press  
to select Outcalling.  
3: For Release 2 or later, press  
then choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to turn Outcalling On for all messages.  
to turn Outcalling On for priority messages only.  
to turn Outcalling Off.  
to return to the Outcalling menu.  
For Release 1 or 1.1, press  
and off.  
to toggle Outcalling on  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
Setting  
2: Press  
to select Outcalling.  
Your  
3: Press  
to change your list of Outcalling Numbers.  
Outcalling  
Numbers  
4: Choose the entry number [1 5].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
continued...  
 
Using Outcalling  
5: Choose an option:  
Press to change or add an Outcalling Number.  
(Go to Step 6.)  
Setting  
Your  
Outcalling  
Numbers  
(continued)  
Press  
Press  
to delete the Outcalling Number.  
to keep the Outcalling Number and return to  
the Outcalling menu.  
6: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to enter a telephone Outcalling Number.  
to enter a pager Outcalling Number.  
to return to the Outcalling menu without  
making a change.  
7: Enter the Outcalling Number and wait 5 seconds for  
the system confirmation.  
8: Choose an option:  
When prompted, press  
. Listen to the Outcalling  
entry information and go to Step 9.  
Press  
to enter more digits, then repeat Step 7.  
9: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
to confirm your entry. Then press  
to cancel your entry.  
if finished.  
You may enter any combination of up to 60 digits  
Guidelines  
including  
,
(for a 1.5-second pause), and  
in an  
Outcalling Number. The Outcalling Number can consist of:  
to access an outside line (this is required to reach  
an external number).  
The telephone number and/or paging system numbers  
(including area codes, if necessary).  
Your paging system personal identification number (PIN),  
if any.  
Your paging system callback number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
continued...  
 
Using Outcalling  
EXAMPLE:  
Guidelines  
Your Outcalling Number is a paging system (555-1234). To  
place the call, the Voice Mail system must access an outside  
line, dial the number, wait several seconds for the paging  
(continued)  
system to answer, enter your PIN followed by  
Callback number followed by  
, and a  
.
The Outcalling Number you would enter is:  
To enter this Outcalling Number, you must dial:  
(where  
represents a pause) to allow the voice  
mail system time to access an outside line.  
to reach your paging system.  
to allow several seconds for the paging  
system to answer.  
followed by  
as your PIN.  
followed by  
as your callback number.  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
Reviewing  
Your  
Outcalling  
Numbers  
2: Press  
to select Outcalling.  
to review your Outcalling Numbers.  
3: Press  
Your Outcalling Cycles setting determines the number of times  
the system will call your list of Outcalling Numbers. The default  
setting is 3 times. It is suggested that you use at least 2 cycles.  
Setting  
Your  
Outcalling  
Cycles  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
2: Press  
to select Outcalling.  
3: Press  
to change your Outcalling Cycles.  
4: Choose an option:  
Enter the number of times [1 9] your Outcalling List  
should be called, then press  
.
Press  
to keep the current setting and return to the  
Outcalling Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Outcalling  
Your Outcalling Interval is the amount of time (in minutes)  
between each Outcalling Cycle. The system default is 15 minutes.  
Setting  
Your  
Outcalling  
Interval  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
2: Press  
to select Outcalling.  
3: Press  
to change your Outcalling interval.  
4: Choose an option:  
Enter the number of minutes [5 99] for the Outcalling  
interval, then press  
Press  
.
to keep the current setting and return to  
the Outcalling menu.  
You can set the time period during which the system will  
perform Outcalling for your mailbox. The default schedule is  
set to perform Outcalling around the clock.  
Setting  
Your  
Outcalling  
Schedule  
1: Log in to Voice Mail.  
2: Press  
to select Outcalling.  
3: Press  
to change your Outcalling Schedule.  
4: Choose an option:  
Press  
Press  
to change starting time and/or ending time.  
to keep the current schedule and return to  
the Outcalling menu.  
5: Enter the starting time in the form hhmm  
(hh=hour, mm=minute), or, to keep the current time,  
press . Repeat this Step to set the ending time.  
6: Choose an option:  
Press  
to approve your new schedule and return to  
the Outcalling menu.  
Press to re-enter. (Return to Step 5).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lu cent Te chnologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
To order additional  
®
MERLIN Messaging User’s Guides,  
please call 800-457-1235  
and reference document  
number 585-323-203.  
Copyright 1999  
Lucent Technologies  
All Rights Reserved  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Search  
WWSearch needs Java to run.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
| A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V| W | X | Y | Z |  
A
Answer-Only Mode  
MERLIN Messaging System mailbox users can set the Answer Mode for their mailboxes. If the  
Answer Mode is set to Answer-Only Mode, callers reaching that mailbox will hear the user's  
mailbox greeting but will not be offered an opportunity to leave a message.  
Automated Attendant  
An Automated Attendant automatically answers incoming calls and routes them to an  
extension or mailbox or plays a submenu or an announcement, based on the Touch-Tone  
input from the caller. Up to four Automated Attendants can be programmed.  
Automated Attendant Announcement  
A voice announcement that is pre-recorded by the System Manager and is played to callers  
who select it from an Automated Attendant Service Main menu or submenu. An Automated  
Attendant Announcement is most commonly used to provide frequently requested  
information such as travel directions or business hours. Up to 99 Announcements can be  
recorded and used.  
Automated Attendant Extension  
An extension that is associated with an Automated Attendant. Calls to an Automated  
Attendant extension that are not answered by the user and are subsequently sent to the  
MERLIN Messaging System for coverage receive Automated Attendant Service.  
Automated Attendant Main menu  
The first menu that callers hear when a MERLIN Messaging System Automated Attendant  
answers a call. The Main menu plays a list of options to the caller. The caller selects an  
option by entering the corresponding Selector Code (a numbered choice, i.e., 1–9) from the  
Automated Attendant Main menu. Based on a predefined association between Main menu  
options and Selector Codes, the Automated Attendant will route the call to a specific  
extension, mailbox, Submenu or Announcement or will disconnect the call. The System  
Selector Code.  
Automated Attendant Main menu Prompt  
The voice prompt that is played to callers whose calls are answered by a MERLIN  
Messaging System Automated Attendant. The Main menu prompt typically greets the caller  
with the business name and offers a list of options from which the caller can choose, such  
as, transferring to an extension or hearing an informational announcement.  
Automated Attendant Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
See Automated Attendant.  
Automated Attendant Submenu  
A lower-level menu selected from an Automated Attendant Main menu or from another  
Submenu. Submenus present additional options from which a caller can select by entering  
the corresponding Selector Code. Based on predefined associations between Selector Codes  
and Selector Code Actions, the Automated Attendant routes the call to an extension,  
mailbox, Submenu or Announcement.  
B
Bilingual Mode  
A MERLIN Messaging System operational mode administered by the System Manager that allows  
callers to select one of two languages in which system prompts, menus and announcements are  
played. If a system is set for Bilingual operation, the System Manager specifies the Primary  
Spanish and Canadian French. See also Primary Language and Secondary Language.  
C
Call Answer Modes  
The MERLIN Messaging System feature that enables a user to determine whether or not  
callers can leave messages in the user's mailbox. If the user selects "Answer-Only Mode,"  
callers will hear a greeting but will not be able to leave a message. The callers can, however,  
transfer to another extension. If the user selects "Record-Mode," callers will hear a greeting  
and be prompted to leave a message after a tone is heard. Callers can then leave a message  
and/or transfer to another extension.  
Call Answer Service  
The MERLIN Messaging System feature that allows callers to leave a message in a user's  
mailbox or to transfer to another extension when the user has not answered the call.  
Call Answer Service Operator  
The person to whom calls are transferred when:  
In Automated Attendant Service, the Automated Attendant Dial 0/Timeout Action is set to  
'Transfer to the Call Answer Service Operator and a caller presses 0 or does not make a  
selection from an Automated Attendant Service Main menu or Submenu.  
In Call Answer Service, if the user has not programmed a Personal Operator a call is  
transferred to the Call Answer Service Operator, when a caller presses 0.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
In any service, either when the caller initiates a transfer by pressing *8 followed by 0, or  
when a caller using Directory Service to transfer a call presses 0.  
Calling Group  
and Coverage Group.  
CNG  
In the data communications environment, a fax calling tone that indicates that a fax machine is  
ready to transmit.  
Coverage  
This communications system feature, programmed by the System Manager, designates an alternate  
answering position when the extension called is busy or does not answer.  
Coverage Delay Interval  
The number of times a call will ring at an extension before it is sent to its assigned Group  
Coverage, if the extension does not have Personal Coverage. If any Personal Coverage (Primary or  
Secondary) is available, the Delay Ring Interval is added to this ring delay for a total Ring Delay  
value.  
Coverage Group  
A group of extensions that is programmed to be covered by the same Group Coverage receiver(s).  
Individual extensions or a Calling Group (such as the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group)  
can be a Group Coverage receiver.  
D
Delay Ring  
A communications system ringing option that provides a delay before the telephone rings. The  
delay is 2 rings for outside line, SA and ICOM buttons. The delay is determined by the  
programmed Delay Ring Interval (1-6 rings) on Cover buttons.  
Delayed Call Handling  
Call Handling mode in which the communications system's system operator or other  
communications system extensions are the principal handlers for incoming (external) calls.  
Dial Plan  
The extension assignments for all equipment (voice or data) connected to the communications  
system. Also called Numbering Plan.  
Dial 0/Timeout Action  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Automated Attendant feature that determines how a call is processed when the caller dials 0  
(zero), does not make a selection from an Automated Attendant Main menu or Submenu or  
when the caller dials 0 from an Automated Attendant Announcement. The Dial 0/Timeout  
Action can be set to disconnect the call or to transfer the call to the system operator, to the  
General Mailbox, to an extension or to a mailbox. The MERLIN Messaging System  
Manager programs the Dial 0/Timeout Action separately for each Automated Attendant's  
Day Service operation and for each Automated Attendant's Night operation.  
Direct-Line Console (DLC)  
Telephone used by a system operator to answer outside calls (not directed to an individual or  
a group) and inside calls, to transfer calls, to make outside calls for users with outward  
calling restrictions, to set up conference calls and to monitor system operation.  
Directory  
Users are listed in the Directory by either their last name or their first name. Callers and users can  
use the Directory to reach a user whose extension they do not know. In addition, users can use the  
Directory to address messages to other users.  
DOSSPM  
A DOS-based System Programming and Maintenance tool used to program and maintain the  
communications system.  
E
Exclusion List  
When the communications system Night Service with Outward Restriction feature is used  
and the Night Service is activated, the users on the Exclusion List can make external calls  
without entering a password. If a password has been programmed, when Night Service is  
activated, users who are not on the Exclusion list must enter a password to make external  
calls.  
Extension  
Number that identifies a phone or other voice or data equipment connected to the communications  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
F
Factory Settings  
The settings that are in effect when the communications system or the MERLIN Messaging  
System is shipped. Sometimes these settings are referred to as default settings.  
Fax Message-Waiting Receiver  
extension or fax Calling Group. See also Message-Waiting Receiver.  
Fax Tone  
See CNG.  
G
General Mailbox  
A mailbox where callers can leave messages if an Automated Attendant's Dial 0/Timeout  
Action is set to "Transfer to the General Mailbox." There is one General Mailbox for each  
Automated Attendant. See also General Mailbox Owner.  
General Mailbox Owner  
The individual responsible for forwarding messages from a General Mailbox to the appropriate  
user. The Message-Waiting indicator on the General Mailbox owner’s telephonephone lights  
whenever a message is placed in the General Mailbox.  
Greeting  
Initial message that plays to callers. See also Personal Greeting, Temporary Closure Greeting and  
Voice Mail Greeting.  
Group Calling  
A communications system feature that directs calls to a group of people assigned to handle the  
external callers to reach the group. See also Calling Group.  
Group Coverage  
Extensions that are grouped together so that they get coverage by the designated Group Coverage  
Receiver(s). The MERLIN Messaging System can be designated as a coverage receiver for one or  
more coverage groups. Each user can create up to ten Personal Group Lists which they can use  
when addressing and sending voice messages. Each list can have up to 50 mailbox extensions in it.  
Guest Mailbox  
A mailbox assigned to visitors, guests or employees who need to receive messages, but do not  
have a telephone assigned to them. Callers using any of the MERLIN Messaging System services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
can leave messages in a guest mailbox, however, the system operator cannot transfer calls to a  
guest mailbox unless the System Manager sets up a phantom extension for the user.  
H
Hunt Pattern  
The search pattern used by the Group Calling feature to find the next available extension for  
answering a call. The MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group should be administered for a  
linear hunt pattern. If this search pattern is specified, the first member is selected. If the first port is  
not available, the next port is selected. The search continues in a linear hunt pattern.  
I
Immediate Call Handling  
Call Handling mode in which the MERLIN Messaging System Automated Attendant serves as the  
primary call handler for incoming (external) calls. The communications system operator serves as  
backup for the Automated Attendant.  
K
Key Mode  
One of three modes of system operation, in which the system uses personal lines on line buttons  
for outside calls with a separate interface (ICOM buttons) for inside calling.  
L
Light Emitting Diode (LED)  
A semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied; such as the lights on  
the telephone, on the communications system processor module and on the MERLIN  
Messaging System module.  
Line Assignments  
A MERLIN Messaging System feature used to assign the lines to specific Automated  
Attendants for Call Handling when Multiple Automated Attendants are used. Lines that are  
not specifically assigned to Automated Attendant 2, Automated Attendant 3 or Automated  
Attendant 4 are handled by Automated Attendant 1.  
M
Mailbox  
Storage space assigned to a MERLIN Messaging System user in which messages can be left for  
the user.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Message-Waiting Receiver  
Group. See also Fax Message-Waiting Receiver.  
Monolingual Mode  
MERLIN Messaging System operation in which a single language is used for system prompts,  
menus and announcements. The available languages are U.S. English, Canadian French and Latin  
American Spanish. Contrast with Bilingual Mode.  
N
Night Service  
The communications system feature that causes calls to ring at specially assigned stations in  
addition to those stations where calls would normally ring. Night Service is usually activated after  
normal business hours. If the MERLIN Messaging System's Schedule Controller is set to 'Follow  
the Switch Mode" or is set to "Follow Both the Switch Mode and the Weekly Business Schedule,"  
when the communications system goes into Night Service, the Automated Attendant will also go  
into Night Service mode; when the communications system is taken out of Night Service, the  
Automated Attendant will go into Day Service mode.  
Numbering Plan  
See Dial Plan.  
O
Outcalling  
A MERLIN Messaging System feature that calls up to five outside or inside telephone  
numbers or pager/beepers to inform a user when a new message has arrived in the user's  
mailbox. Users administer their own Outcalling number list, their Outcalling schedule, the  
number of cycles the Outcalling list is dialed and the minimum number of minutes that the  
system should wait between Outcalling attempts. Users also can turn Outcalling On or Off  
as required. This feature is only available if the System Manager has assigned Outcalling  
privileges to the user's voice mailbox .  
Outcalling Cycles  
The number of times the system dials the designated Outcalling numbers in the Outcalling list  
when Outcalling is On and a message has been deposited in a user’s mailbox.  
Outcalling List  
The programmed telephone numbers that the system dials when Outcalling is on and a  
message is deposited in a user's mailbox. In an Outcalling list there can be up to five  
telephone or telephone/pagerr numbers (with up to 60 digits each).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Outcalling Schedule  
The time period during which Outcalling will be attempted, if Outcalling is On and a message is  
deposited in a user's mailbox.  
Overflow Coverage  
The method of designating a secondary Calling Group or the Queued Call Console (Hybrid/PBX  
Coverage Threshold.  
Overflow Coverage Threshold  
sent to another Calling Group by the Overflow Coverage feature. See also Overflow Coverage.  
P
PC Card  
The MERLIN Messaging System's 2-Port, 4-Port and 6-Port Cards are PC Cards that plug  
into the left-most PCMCIA slot on the MERLIN Messaging System module. They provide  
the following features: port licensing, media for backup of the MERLIN Messaging System  
and a Remote Maintenance Device that is used to gain access to the diagnostic features of  
the MERLIN Messaging System.  
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA)  
A storage medium similar to a computer's floppy disk. The MERLIN Messaging System  
2-Port, 4-Port and 6-Port PC Cards are PCMCIA Cards that contain port licensing  
information, a Remote Maintenance Device and storage media for the system's backup  
feature.  
Personal Greeting  
A greeting recorded by a user that callers hear when they are transferred to a user’s mailbox. A  
user can record up to three Personal Greetings.  
Personal Group Lists  
A list, created by a MERLIN Messaging System user, that can contain up to 50 entries. Each  
entry is the extension number of a MERLIN Messaging System user. Personal Group Lists  
can be a timesaving feature when addressing messages. The user simply enters the number  
(1–10) of the pre-created list that contains the extensions of the desired addressees, instead  
of entering the extensions one at a time.  
Personal Operator  
An extension or mailbox that receives calls if a caller dials 0 when the caller reaches the user’s  
voice mailbox. Each user can program a Personal Operator.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Primary Language  
The default language used for playing system prompts, menus and announcements to callers  
when the MERLIN Messaging System is in Bilingual mode. Contrast with Secondary  
Language.  
Q
Queued Call Console  
Telephone that can be used by a system operator only if the communications system is in  
Hybrid/PBX mode. It is used to answer outside calls (directed to a system operator  
position), to answer inside calls, to direct inside and outside calls to an extension or to an  
outside telephone number, to serve as a message center, to make outside calls for users with  
outward calling restrictions, to set up conference calls and to monitor system operation.  
R
Record Mode  
One of the two Call Answer Modes available for MERLIN Messaging System mailboxes.  
Users program the Call Answer Mode for their mailboxes. When Record Mode is  
programmed, callers can leave messages in a user's mailbox. Contrast with Answer-Only  
Mode.  
Remote Maintenance Device (RMD)  
A component of the MERLIN Messaging System used to remotely access terminal-based features  
such as system diagnostic information. The System Manager can access the system through the  
RMD to capture a Configuration report to a file on a remote PC.  
Return Time Interval  
See Transfer Return Interval  
S
Schedule Controller  
Determines whether the communication system's Day/Night Service mode, the MERLIN  
Messaging System Weekly Business Schedule or a combination of both control the Day and  
Night service operation of an Automated Attendant. Each Automated Attendant has its own  
Schedule Controller.  
Secondary Language  
The alternate language in which callers can choose to play system prompts, menus and  
announcements when the MERLIN Messaging System is in Bilingual mode. Contrast with  
Primary Language.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Security  
Measures taken against the possibility of Toll Fraud. Look for Security Alerts throughout this  
Online Guide for information about protecting your system.  
Selector Code  
A one-digit number (1–9) representing a menu option that callers select from a Main menu or a  
Submenu in order to transfer to an extension or mailbox or to play a Submenu or play an  
announcement. Selector Codes can also be programmed for direct dialing of individual extension  
numbers. See also Selector Code Action.  
Selector Code Action  
A one-digit number (1-9) representing a menu option that callers select from a Main menu  
or a Submenu in order to transfer to an extension or mailbox or to play a Submenu or  
announcement. Selector Codes can also be programmed for direct dialing of individual  
extension numbers. See Selector Code.  
Submenu Prompt  
The list of options that play after callers select a Submenu from a Main menu or from another  
Submenu. The Submenu prompt offers the list of options available on the Submenu and announces  
the Selector Codes for callers to dial to reach the extension, mailbox, Submenu or announcement  
they want.  
System Administration Password  
A password used to access the menus needed to administer the system.  
System Language  
Secondary Language.  
System Manager  
The person who updates and changes the MERLIN Messaging System to meet the company’s  
requirements.  
System Parameters  
The MERLIN Messaging System parameters are a set of options that can be programmed by  
the System Manger, such as System Language Mode, System Date and Time, Call Answer  
Service Operator, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
T
Temporary Closure Greeting  
A MERLIN Messaging System feature that enables the System Manager to record and schedule a  
special greeting to be played before the Automated Attendant's Main menu prompt. This feature is  
used in conjunction with the Temporary Schedule feature. A Temporary Closure Greeting is used  
when a company closes for a holiday, for an emergency or because of inclement weather.  
Temporary Schedule  
The MERLIN Messaging System Manager can set up a Temporary Schedule to override the  
regular Day/Night operation of an Automated Attendant.  
Tip/Ring (T/R)  
Contacts and associated conductors of a single-line telephone.  
Toll Fraud  
The unauthorized use of your communications system by third parties to make long distance  
telephone calls. Under the law, you, the customer, are responsible for paying part or all of those  
unauthorized calls.  
Touch-Tone Duration  
The length (specified in milliseconds) of the Touch-Tone codes sent from the  
communications system to the MERLIN Messaging System.  
Touch-Tone Interval  
The interval (specified in milliseconds) between Touch-Tone codes sent from the communications  
system to the MERLIN Messaging System.  
Touch-Tone Receivers  
Devices used to decode DTMF (dual-tone multifrequency) Touch-Tones. Touch-Tone  
Receivers are included in some communications system modules. The MERLIN Messaging  
System module has two Touch-Tone Receivers.  
Transfer Redirect Extension  
The extension number to which transferred calls are redirected if the calls have not been answered  
or the extensions are busy and they do not have coverage. The default extension is the first  
operator's extension. This extension can also be a Queued Call Console (QCC), another extension  
or the extension of the MERLIN Messaging System Calling Group. The Transfer Redirect  
extension is programmed by the System Manager of the communications system.  
Transfer Restrictions  
Prevents users and callers from committing toll fraud by transferring to an outside line or outside  
operator who could place a call for them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Transfer Return Interval  
The number of times a transferred call will ring at the transfer destination before it returns to  
the transfer originator. See also VMS Transfer Return Interval.  
Transfer-Only Extension  
An extension that has no message storage space allotted to it on the MERLIN Messaging System.  
It is used in conjunction with the MERLIN Messaging Transfer Restrictions feature to allow  
callers to transfer from the MERLIN Messaging System to extensions that do not need mailboxes.  
U
V
VMS Transfer Return Interval  
The number of times a call, transferred by the MERLIN Messaging System to an extension  
also Transfer Redirect Extension.  
Voice Mail Greeting  
The greeting that plays to users who call the MERLIN Messaging System Voice Mail  
Service. The greeting prompts the users to log into their mailbox.  
Voice Mail Service  
A MERLIN Messaging System service that allows a user to send messages to other users,  
retrieve messages, record up to three Personal Greetings, create a mailbox password,  
program a Personal Operator, set the mailbox's Call Answer Mode and, if the mailbox has  
outcalling permission, program Outcalling options.  
W
Weekly Business Schedule  
A MERLIN Messaging System feature that enables the System Manager to set a schedule  
that will determine when the Automated Attendant's Day or Night Menus play.  
WinSPM  
A Windows-based System Programming and Maintenance tool used to program and  
maintain the communications system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Help  
Navigation  
You can move from one topic to another in the Online Guide by activating topic-associated  
hypertext links. This can be done in any of the following ways:  
From a topic listed in the Contents Panel on the left side of the screen.  
From the Technology Bar at the bottom of the screen.  
From within the topic text.  
The Technology Bar  
The Technology Bar located at the lower right hand corner of the screen contains a number of  
icons. Each icon is responsible for a different navigational action.  
Icon  
Action  
Redisplays the Main menu options in the Contents Panel  
Links to the previous topic in the sequence  
Takes you to the top of the window  
Links to the next topic in the sequence  
The Button Bar  
The Button Bar is displayed in a non-scrolling panel across the top of the screen. It provides  
access to additional online features and capabilities. To view a feature or access a capability, click  
the associated button. Note that in the case of features displayed in pop-up windows (for example,  
the Glossary), you must close the window before you are able to proceed.  
Button  
Action  
Redisplays the Main menu  
options in the Contents Panel  
Allows you to search for  
information by entering a key  
word  
Links you to the MERLIN  
Messaging Glossary  
Provides access to the online  
help feature  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Displays a table containing  
Touch-Tones and rules which  
are valid for all menus  
Programming Conventions  
The procedures for programming the MERLIN Messaging System in this Online Guide use  
several conventions to indicate what the steps involve. The conventions are described in the  
following table:  
Typeface Sample  
Meaning  
To select this option, press this imprinted button on the  
console  
GrpCalling  
To select this menu option, use the corresponding unlabeled  
display button  
[nnn]  
Enter the variable information in brackets  
Press this key on the PC  
Press this function key on the PC  
+
On the PC, hold down the first key and press the second key  
Continuation of procedures  
Click here to return to previous topic.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

La Crosse Technology Clock WT 3181 User Manual
Legacy Car Audio Car Amplifier LA 220 User Manual
LG Electronics Convection Oven MC 924JLA User Manual
LG Electronics Washer WM3001HA User Manual
Mackie Stereo Amplifier HM 54 User Manual
Makita Cordless Drill 6096D User Manual
Martin Audio Portable Speaker WTUB User Manual
Master Bilt Refrigerator BMG 27 User Manual
Master Bilt Refrigerator TEL 2 30 User Manual
Meade Telescope 60AZ AR User Manual